User Manual ARRICAM ST/LT – Nov 2003
THE ARRICAM SYSTEM
USERS’ GUIDE
11/2003
Software Version 03E
ALL ARTWORK, PICTURES AND TEXTS ARE COVERED
BY ARNOLD AND RICHTER COPYRIGHT.
THEY MUST NOT BE COPIED FOR REPRODUCTION
(E.G. ON CD-ROM DISKS OR INTERNET-SITES)
OR USED IN THEIR ENTIRE FORM OR IN EXCERPTS
WITHOUT PREVIOUS WRITTEN AGREEMENT.
IF YOU ARE DOWNLOADING PDF-FILES FROM OUR
INTERNET HOME-PAGE FOR YOUR PERSONAL USE,
MAKE SURE TO CHECK FOR UPDATED
VERSIONS.
WE CANNOT TAKE ANY LIABILITY WHATSOEVER
FOR DOWNLOADED FILES, AS TECHNICAL DATA ARE
SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
Disclaimer
No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without prior written consent of ARRI. ARRI assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. The information is subject to change without notice. For actual design, refer to the latest publications of ARRI data sheets or data books, etc., for the most up-to-date specifications of ARRI products. Not all products and/or types are available in every country. Please check with an ARRI
Sales Representative for availability and additional information.
While ARRI endeavours to enhance the quality, reliability and safety of the ARRI products, customers agree and acknowledge that the possibility of defects thereof cannot be eliminated entirely. To minimize risks of damage to property or injury (including death) to persons arising from defects in the ARRI products, customers must incorporate sufficient safety measures in their work with the system. ARRI or its subsidiaries does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of ARRI products or any other liability arising from the use of such products.
No license, express, implied or otherwise, is granted under any patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of ARRI or others. ARRI or its subsidiaries expressly excludes any liability, warranty, demand or other obligation for any claim, representation, or cause, or action,or whatsoever, express or implied, whether in contract or tort, including negligence, or incorporated in terms and conditions, whether by statue, law or otherwise. In no event shall ARRI or its subsidiaries be liable
for or you have a remedy for recovery of any special, direct, indirect, incidental, or consequential damages, including but not limited to lost profits, lost savings, lost revenues or economic loss of any kind or for any claim by third party, downtime, good-will, damage to or replacement of equipment or property, any costs or recovering of any material or goods associated with the assembly or use of our products, or any other damages or injury of persons and so on or under any other legal theory.
Preface
At the beginning of the 21st century, the entertainment industry more than ever demands broader knowledge and greater skill from contemporary cinematographers.
Being used for feature films, miniseries, documentary films, music promos or advertisements, all these different kinds of productions request dedicated and versatile cinematographic equipment. Because of the variety of assignments today and tomorrow, cameras must be mounted on dollies and cranes, on tripods and special rigs, on Steadicam and sophisticated three axis remote controlled heads, operated from the shoulder or on the lap, in several extreme atmospheric conditions – these are only a few out of a wide range of different tasks – nowadays equipment must be flexible enough to allow the best possible work without having to accept compromises. So far, the inventive and creative cinematographer and his/her crew have to get hold of cameras and accessories suitable for all kinds of working situations.
Based on the huge amount of expertise collected during designing and producing such cameras as the ARRIFLEX
435, 535 and 765 or the MOVIECAM Compact and SL as well as with the intention to fulfil most of the desires of today’s customers, the two leading companies in the field, ARRI and MOVIECAM, have joined their knowledge and inventive power to build a new line of equipment, unifying the best of two worlds.
It was a real challenge for us to develop a system which allows each cinematographer to set up the appropriate equipment for each particular job more easily than ever before.
The solution was to build up a wide range of compatible accessories around two camera bodies, each one optimised for dedicated operations.
The ARRICAM System Users’ Guide we herewith present to you is not simply an instruction manual to a new camera, but a handbook of an equipment line that includes the most quiet compact 35 mm camera for multiple applications and increased utilization.
Please take time to read the following pages carefully.
You will see that the ARRICAM System offers you a great variety of possibilities. Like the camera system itself, its
System Users’ Guide consists of several interchangeable parts that will continuously be updated.
In visiting our home page www.arri.com, you will find all updated information about all components of the system. Furthermore, interesting news and publications can be downloaded from there.
Frédéric-Gérard Kaczek AAC and the ARRICAM Team
Preliminary Remarks
The ARRICAM System is based on two different camera bodies, each one with special characteristics. Even though there are some important differences, several parts of the two bodies are comparable in function and design. Therefore, you will find some common descriptions in the following pages.
Design and technical data are subject to change!
Care and Cleaning
The ARRICAM System is almost maintenance-free.
There is only one requirement for a smooth operation: the cameras and the accessories have to be meticulously clean. Therefore you should protect them against any dirt or smudges.
Clean the camera exterior with a glass cleaner. Only when really necessary, e.g. to remove camera tape gum, alcohol or benzine should be used.
Caution!
1. When cleaning the equipment, do not moisten connectors!
2. Never use acetone!
When applied properly, compressed air is the best cleaner; a vacuum cleaner or an air syringe will do fine.
Cotton tips, orangesticks, soft and hard brushes may be used for gentle cleaning.
Caution!
1. Compressed air should only be used for blowing the magazines! Apart from this, high pressure does more harm than good, especially to glass surfaces.
2. The camera should only be lubricated at a
ARRICAM Maintenance Centre!
PREFACE
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
3
PREFACE
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
4
CARE AND CLEANING
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
5
Table of Contents
Copyright notes
Disclaimer
Preface
Preliminary remarks
Care & cleaning
Table of Contents
Safety and Product specifications
1
THE ARRICAM CAMERA BODIES
The cameras’ front, dust check, beeper, lens port
The cameras’ right sides
The cameras’ rear
The cameras’ left sides, Door
The Camera Control Panels
The list of warnings and messages
The cameras’ top
The camera bodies’ bases
The cameras’ interiors, Movement, Aperture Plate,
Spacer Plate, Format Masks
2
THE MAGAZINES & MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
The four ARRICAM Magazines
Care & cleaning
The Magazine Cover
The Coreholder
The Digital Footage Counter
Setting unit of measurement and ASA
The Tightening Wheels
The Remaining Footage Indicator
The Loop Protector
The ARRICAM Magazine Adapters
Mounting/removing the Magazine Adapters
Mounting Studio Magazines on Adapters
Adapters’ Carrying Handles
The Studio Mag to Lite Camera Adapter
3
LOADING THE MAGAZINES,
THREADING THE CAMERAS
Loading the Magazines
Mounting Magazines and threading
4
THE ARRICAM OPTICAL VIEWFINDERS
Introduction/Overview
The ARRICAM Viewfinders
The ARRICAM 100% Video Tops (1)
Mounting a Viewfinder
The Viewfinders’ housing
Viewing Filter Lever
TABLE OF CONTENT
6
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
101
106
121
125
130
132
134
135
3
4
5
6
10
79
80
81
82
73
76
77
78
84
85
88
90
94
97
17
23
25
28
31
44
57
60
61
The Viewfinders’ Arms
Swivelling the Viewfinder Arms
Adjustment of the swivel friction
Ergonomy
Pivoting the Eyepiece
Levelling of the Viewfinder image
The swing-in de-squeezer
The Eyepiece
Mounting the Eyepiece
The Eyecup
The Heated Eyecup
The Eyepiece Extensions
Viewfinder Levelling Rod
The ARRICAM Fieldlens & Ground Glasses
The Frameglows
5
THE INTEGRATED VIDEO SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Important notes and safety specifications
The ARRICAM Video Assists’ components
The Video Assist
The 100% Video Tops (2)
Mounting the Video Assists
The connectors and the LED indicator
The mechanical adjustments of the CCD
The Video Assists’ Iris control dial
The Manual Gain Control button
The ON/OFF/CHECK/HIDE MENU switch & LED
The Menu/Store dial
The Video Assist On Screen Display (OSD)
The Video Menu Structure
The Video On Board Monitors
Control Menu of the 6.6” On Board Monitor
6
STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
Mounting the Readout Unit & function
The Lens Data System (LDS)
The LDS Lenses
The Lens Data Boxes (LDB)
Mounting the Lens Data Boxes
The ARRICAM Studio LDB Adapter
Connectors and control LEDS
Connecting Lens Motors to the LDB
Lens Data Displays (LDD and LDD-FP)
Connecting the Lens Data Displays
The LDD and LDD-FP LEDs and controls
Function of the Lens Data Displays
The LDD Screen
The LDD-FP Screen
The LDD-FP Menu structure
Marking the Focus Scale
Focus Tracking
TABLE OF CONTENT
7
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
137
137
138
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
150
151
153
161
163
163
165
166
168
173
176
176
177
178
179
180
209
214
238
241
243
246
248
257
260
263
267
221
224
226
227
229
231
233
237
7
THE MANUAL CONTROL BOX, THE SPEED CONTROL BOX,
THE TIMING SHIFT BOX
Introduction 271
Automatic exposure compensation
Stroboscopy, motion blur and depth of field.
The Manual Control Box (MCB)
The MCB Cable Adaptor
The Speed Control Box (SCB)
SCB connectors
SCB controls and displays
Functions and operations of the SCB
The ramping function
The synchronisation features
The Timing Shift Box
The Remote Control Station (RCS)
THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
Mounting the ISB
The ISB LEDs and controls
Jam-syncing
The ISB Handheld PC/Menu Structure
THE CAMERA SUPPORTS
Carrying Handles
Power Bridgeplate
The Camera Handgrips
The Shoulder Set
The Accessory Holders
The Universal Low Mode Set
272
272
274
275
281
284
285
292
294
297
301
303
309
315
319
320
328
345
345
349
351
353
355
352
10
ARRICAM POWER MANAGEMENT
11
MISCELLANEOUS
Standard 35/Super 35 Conversion
3 Perforation/4 Perforation Conversion
The Work Light
Checking the Mirror Shutter manually
The Wired Handgrip Attachment (WHA-2 & 3)
The Accessory Power Box (APB)
Tools
12
APPENDIX
Technical Data
Acronyms and Abbreviations
ARRI Group Addresses
Status, Warning and Troubleshooting List
Cables and Connectors
Acknowledgment
361
371
372
373
374
376
378
380
TABLE OF CONTENT
8
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
THE ARRICAM CAMERA BODIES
Lens Port, Camera Control Panels, Movement, Aperture Plate,
Gate, Spacer Plate, Format Masks
THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
Studio Magazines, Lite Magazines, Dual Port Adapter, Back Load
Adapter, Top Load Adapter, Studio Mag to Lite Camera Adapter,
Lite Mag to Studio Camera Adapter
LOADING THE MAGAZINES,
THREADING THE CAMERAS
Safety Specifications
Warnings
Notice
Operational error possible!
Danger of injury or equipment damage possible!
THE ARRICAM OPTICAL VIEWFINDERS
Studio Viewfinders, Lite Viewfinders, Viewfinder Extension, Eyepiece, Ground Glasses, Frameglows, Frameglow Masks
THE INTEGRATED VIDEO SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Studio Video Assist, Lite Video Assist, 100% Video Tops,
On Board Monitors
STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
LDS Lenses, Lens Data Boxes, Lens Data Displays,
Lens Data Screens
THE MANUAL CONTROL BOX, THE SPEED
CONTROL BOX, THE TIMING SHIFT BOX
MCB Adapter Cable, Remote Control Station
THE ARRICAM IN-CAMERA SLATE SYSTEM
In-camera Slate Box, Exposure Module, Handheld PC, OCR
THE CAMERA SUPPORTS
Power Bridgeplate, Shoulder Set, Carrying Handles, Brackets,
Universal Low Mode Set, Dovetail Attachment System
ARRICAM POWER MANAGEMENT
Batteries, Power Supply Unit
MISCELLANEOUS
35/Super 35 Conversion, Work Light, 3/4 Perforation Conversion,
Shutter Check, Wired Handgrip Attachment, Accessory Power Box, Tools
General Safety Specifications
Caution! Danger of injury! Never place your hand in the lens port or inside of the camera while it is RUNNING.
• In order to ensure optimal performance, it is essential that you acquaint yourself with this Users’ Guide.
• Assembly and initial operation should be carried out only by persons who are familiar with the equipment!
• Switch OFF the camera MAIN switch before making electrical connections (i.e. plugging on accessory boxes)!
• Never RUN the camera without a lens or a protective cap mounted in the lens port.
• Never operate the movement locking mechanism while the camera is RUNNING!
• Ensure that the camera is securely mounted!
• Remove the battery cable before transport or servicing!
• Repairs should be carried out only by authorized service centres!
• Use only original ARRI replacement parts and accessories!
APPENDIX
Technical Data, Acronyms, Addresses, Cables and Connectors
SAFETY SPECIFICATIONS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
10
Important Notes
• In wet weather the normal safety precautions for handling electrical equipment should be taken.
• Avoid operational errors!
• Clean optical surfaces only with a lens brush or a clean lens cloth! In case of solid dirt moisten a lens cloth with pure alcohol.
• Do not use solvents to clean the film gate!
• Do not remove any screws which are secured with paint!
Product Specifications
In case of enquiries or when ordering parts, please advise camera serial number and model.
Notice
This Users’ Guide applies to the ARRICAM Studio and the ARRICAM Lite as well as the whole
ARRICAM Accessory range. Sections that only apply to one camera model or accessory type are indicated as such in the heading.
Several items described in this Users’ Guide are in preparation.
Because ARRI has already published several dedicated manuals about accessories, e.g. Follow Focus or Matte Boxes, this components are not described here.
The products and accessories recommended by the manufacturer fulfill the specifications of the EU-Guideline 89/336/EWG.
SAFETY/PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
11
5
4
3
2
1
26 6 24 25 23 9 22
11
21
6
7
8
9
10
1 3 2 27 4 28 30
1 CAMERA MAIN SWITCH (ON/OFF)
2 POWER CONNECTOR (24 V)
3 CAMERA ACCESSORY CONNECTOR (CAC)
4 CAMERA ACCESSORY PORT COVERS
5 STUDIO VIDEO ASSIST
6 FOOTAGE COUNTER
7 STUDIO MAGAZINE 300/1000
8 STUDIO VIEWFINDER
9 LDS LENS
10 MATTE BOX (MB 14)
11 ATTACHMENT ROSETTE
12 FOLLOW FOCUS
13 STUDIO MEDIUM EXTENSION
14 MANUAL FOOTAGE INDICATOR
15 TIGHTENING WHEEL
16 TOP LOAD ADAPTER WITH HANDGRIP
17 CAMERA DOOR
18 TAPE MEASURE HOOK
19 STUDIO DOOR FRICTION ADJUSTMENT SCREW
20 CAMERA CONTROL PANEL WITH RUN BUTTON
21 BASE PLATE
22 LIGHTWEIGHT MATTE BOX (LMB 5)
23 LITE VIEWFINDER
24 LITE CARRYING HANDLE
25 LITE VIDEO ASSIST
26 LITE SHOULDER MAGAZINE
27 SHOULDER PAD
28 RISER PLATE (SHOULDER SET)
29 LEFT HANDGRIP
30 RIGHT HANDGRIP WITH RUN BUTTON
12
13
8
9
10
22 9 23 24 25
29 2 28 20 17 27
26
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
STUDIO LITE
THE ARRICAM CAMERA BODIES
The Camera Bodies
The cameras’ front
On the front of both cameras, an LDS 54 mm ARRI PL
(positive lock) lens port accepts lenses (spherical or anamorphic) fitted with either LDS PL or with the well established regular PL mounts. Depending on the orientation of the lens port, the ARRICAM Cameras will allow shooting in either Standard 35 or Super 35 format. The shooting mode is shown by the number 1 (for 35) or 2
(for S35) facing the index.
Notice
It is recommended an ARRICAM Maintenance
Centre or rental house performs the change of format from 35 to S35 or vice versa. If you must do it yourself, please see the related instructions in chapter
11 – Miscellaneous.
The ARRICAM Cameras are equipped with LDS PL mounts which differ from the regular PL mounts of the
ARRIFLEX and MOVIECAM cameras in that they are equipped with electrical contacts that communicate lens data to the camera. Two sets of LDS contacts are integrated in each lens port to allow the fitting of the lens according to the needs of the focus puller: The index lines of the lens can be seen from the top and the bottom or left and the right side of the camera
Notice
Even though there is a difference between the LDS PL mount and the regular PL mount, all 35mm lenses fitted with PL mounts can be mounted in the new LDS PL port.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
17
Studio front
fig.1/1
Lens Data Box connector
Beeper
Beeper volume control
Lens port lever
35/S35 index
Lens port
35/S35 markings
DUST CHECK button
24 V dc outlet RS connector
UNLOCK button
(only on extended control panel)
Lite front
fig.1/2
DUST CHECK button
24 V outlets heatable eyecup/ work light
35/S35 index
35/S35 markings
Lens port
Lens port levers
24 V dc outlet RS connector
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
18
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
To remove a lens (or lens port cover), rotate the lens port levers counter-clockwise as far as possible while grasping the lens firmly. Then carefully remove the lens.
To fit a lens, align guide groove in the lens flange with locating pin in the lens port. Insert the lens flange flat on the receptacle, making certain the pin engages the lensflange hole easily. Rotate lens lock gently clockwise to secure until the lens is seated properly. Do not use force!
Notice
1. Especially with heavier lenses, great care must be taken that the lens is mounted in a straight line with the port.
2. The LDS Lens must be mounted in the 12 o’clock or 3 o’clock position to enable the LDS functions.
3. When attaching the lens or lens port cover, take great care not to harm any elements (e.g. LDS contacts).
4. Heavy and long lenses, such as ZEISS Variable
Prime Lenses or zoom lenses, must be supported at all times by means of dedicated accessories.
5. When mounting an LDS Lens, one must be sure that the contacts and the mount itself are perfectly clean in order to assure good electricronic communication as well as an even fit of the lens on the camera port.
Both Studio and Lite
THE DUST CHECK BUTTON
Because the mirror and the movement are driven separately, moving the mirror by means of the inching knob is not possible. It is also recommended not to move it manually, there is danger of damage. To check the gate, either by looking through the lens or by removing it, turn the mirror out of the way by briefly pushing
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
19
the DUST CHECK button. Even when shooting with a reduced shutter angle, operating the DUST CHECK button, will open the shutter to 180° and DC will appear on the FPS display(s).
Caution!
When you need to clean the gate, it is imperative to turn OFF the camera power first.
After having cleaned the gate, turn the power ON and briefly push the DUST CHECK button to turn the mirror into the viewing position – the shutter will return to its preset angle again automatically.
Studio front
fig.1/3
Beeper volume control
Lens Data Box connector
DUST CHECK button
24 V dc outlet RS connector
Lite front
fig.1/4
DUST CHECK button
24 V dc outlet
Work light/heated eyecup
24 V dc outlet RS connector
On the Studio and Lite
24V OUTLET RS CONNECTOR
To the left of the lens port there is a 24 V outlet marked RS
( RUN). This three-pin Fischer connector is protected by a
1.6 A resettable fuse and may be used to remote control the camera status RUN or STOP as well as for supply power to any kind of 24 V accessory, e.g. a zoom drive.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
20
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Only on the Studio
BEEPER AND BEEPER VOLUME CONTROL
Only the ARRICAM Studio is equipped with a beeper.
Its volume can be increased in three steps by turning the switch clockwise. The number shown on the switch will indicate the adjustment: 1=low, 2=medium and
3=loud. When selecting the position 0, the beeper is
OFF. When the beeper is not turned OFF, it will sound briefly when the camera is in RUN UP or RUN DOWN status. It will beep intermittently as long as the camera is
RUNNING in ASYNC status.
On the Studio
LDB CONNECTOR
Hidden behind the front right side camera cover (fig.
1/3), a large connector is mounted on the camera front. When the cover is removed, either a Lens Data
Box Cable Adaptor or the Studio Lens Data Box itself can be attached to this connector.
On the Lite
24 V HEATED EYECUP/WORK LIGHT OUTLETS
On both sides of the lens port, small connectors supply the 24 V dc power for the following two accessories: the Work Light and the Heated Eyecup.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
21
Studio right side
fig.1/5
CAC connector accessory attachments
Attachments points for accessory port covers
Lens port levers
RS connector for right handgrip button
Threaded holes for attaching the lower cover or ISB
Power connector
Main switch
In-camera Slate
Box connector
Right handgrip rosette attachment
Lite right side
fig.1/6
Main switch
Magazine release knob
Accessory attachments
Connector for
Lens Data Box
Lens port levers
RS connector for right handgrip button
CAC connector
Power connector
Attachment for
Lens Data Box
Attachment rosette
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
22
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
The cameras’ right sides
On the Studio and Lite
RIGHT HANDGRIP ROSETTE ATTACHMENT
The right handgrip is screwed into the threaded socket in the rosette centre.
On the Studio and Lite
CONNECTOR FOR THE RIGHT HANDGRIP RUN
BUTTON
The 24 V RS connector can either be used to supply 24
V for accessories or to connect a switch for changing between the RUN and STOP (i.e. Standby) status.
On the Studio and Lite
ACCESSORY ATTACHMENTS
The Carrying Handle or e.g. Universal Low Mode
Bracket is attached to the threaded sockets and gauged holes on top of the right camera side.
On the Studio and Lite
PROTECTION COVERS
Covers
fig.1/7
➔
➔
➔
➔
➔
Protection covers are components of the ARRICAM System and should be handled with care. When removing them from the camera bodies, store them immediately in
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
23
their cases. When no accessory box or cable adapter is mounted on the camera, the appropriate protecting cover must be fitted instead of it to protect the sensitive connectors!
On the Studio only
RELEASE KNOB OF THE UPPER PROTECTION COVERS
To remove an upper protecting cover, press the release knob and slide the upper front cover forward or the upper rear cover backwards. When mounting the protection covers, be sure that they are flush to the camera before sliding them into the locked position.
Notice
Do not tilt the upper covers during mounting or removing, and do not use force!
By removing the upper front cover the connector for the
Studio Lens Data Box (ST-LDB) will appear.
By removing the upper rear cover the connector for the
Speed Control Box (SCB) will appear.
On the Studio only
RELEASE SCREWS OF THE LOWER COVER
Remove the lower cover for mounting the In-camera
Slate Box (ISB).
On the Lite only
RELEASE SCREW OF THE COVER
To mount the LT-LDB on the Lite, you must first remove the cover by unscrewing one 3 mm hex screw.
The cameras’ rear
On the Studio and Lite
CAC CONNECTOR FOR ACCESSORIES
The 16-pin Fischer connector, mounted obliquely for convenience and labelled CAC (camera accessory connector) is the main communication port of the cameras.
Several accessories can be attached there. For further information see the accessory descriptions and the fig.
1/8 and 1/9 on page 27.
POWER CONNECTOR
The 2-pin Fischer power receptacle, mounted obliquely for convenience, is used to connect a 24 V battery or a 24 V dc Power Supply Unit. Further information about the power supply and power distribution of the
ARRICAM System is described in chapter 10 – Power
Management.
MAIN SWITCH
Protected by two flanges, the MAIN switch will interrupt the power supply of all electronic components, except the one of the clock in the In-camera Slate Box – it remains powered to keep the clock working.
SCREWS FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES ONLY
On both camera bodies, there are several screws which are dedicated for maintenance work only. These screws are marked with a special seal lacquer and/or a safety label.
25
25
Caution!
Do not touch these screws, otherwise severe damage can occur!
CAMERA OPENINGS
One of the main differences between the two camera bodies is that you are able to mount Studio Magazines in one of three different positions (top, back or inclined) on the Studio by means of the various magazine adapters while the Lite allows the attachment of the lightweight Lite Magazines at the rear only. In order to install Studio Magazines on the Lite, you will have to use the Studio Magazine to Lite Camera Adapter. Lite magazines may now be mounted on the Studio, in the rear position only, by means of the Studio Camera to
Lite Magazine Adapter.
On the Studio only
REAR CAMERA OPENING AND MAGAZINE ADAPTER
ATTACHMENTS
In order to mount one of the four Studio Magazine
Adapters, fit the adapter on the camera body while taking care that the two adjusting pins enter the threaded holes easily. Then you will have to tighten the six retaining screws firmly – see caution on page 88.
On the Studio only
CONNECTORS FOR THE SCB AND MCB/TSB
These two connectors allow the mounting of the Speed
Control Box (SCB) and the Manual Control Box (MCB) or Timing Shift Box (TSB) – see chapter 7.
Both connectors must be protected by covers if not used.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
26
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Notice
To use the Manual Control Box (MCB) or the Timing
Shift Box (TSB) and the Speed Control Box (SCB) together, you must first mount the SCB and then the
MCB/TSB. To remove the SCB, you will first have to remove the MCB/TSB from the camera: The MCB/
TSB physically blocks the attachment and removal of the SCB
Studio rear
fig.1/8
Threaded holes and connector for the
magazine adapters
Camera opening
MCB/TSB connector
SCB connector
Attachements for magazine adapters
CAC connector
Power connector
Main switch
Setscrew for maintenance only Door hinge
Lite rear
fig.1/9
Release button for magazines/mag.adapter
Electric contacts for the magazine/ mag.adapter
Main switch
CAC connector
Power connector
Camera opening Rails for the magazines/mag.adapter
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
27
The cameras’ left sides
On the Studio and Lite
THE CAMERA DOOR
The door is located on the camera’s left side. To open the door, push the little spring-lock forwards and lift the lock latch, then turn the lock latch counter-clockwise.
When closing the door, press it gently towards the camera body and then turn the lock latch clockwise. When it is closed, the door lock latch must be flush with the door; the spring-lock keeps the lock in this position.
Notice
When closing the door, be sure that the movement, the film guides and the buckle switch are placed in the correct position. When the movement is in its loading position, the door cannot be closed.
Door Lock
fig.1/10 door lock safety door lock latch
1.
➡
2.
➦
➡
3.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
28
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
On the Studio and Lite
HOOK FOR TAPE MEASURE
The tape measure can be attached to the hook that indicates the image plane. Further hooks are provided on several accessories.
On the Studio only
ADJUSTABLE DOOR HINGE AND REMOVABLE DOOR
Should you want to alter the friction of the door use a 2 mm metric hex wrench to adjust the screw at the top of the lower hinge until the desired friction is set.
To remove the door, loosen this screw fully, then by pressing and holding the lever, lift the door up clear of the hinges. When mounting the door on the camera, take care that the hinge-pins enter the hinges properly.
Studio Door
fig.1/11
2.
1.
➡
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
29
Studio left side
fig.1/12
Viewfinder mounting plate
Connectors 24 V for heated eyecup work light
Accessory attachment
Door
Lens port levers
Camera control panel
Indication of film plane/
Tape hook
Door lock latch
Door lock safety
Adjustable door hinge
Lite left side
fig.1/13
Upper camera control panel
Viewfinder mounting plate
Door lock safety
Magazine/ adapter release button
Lens port levers
Lower camera control panel
Door
Door lock latch
Indication of film plane/ tape hook
Threaded hole for magazine adapter
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
30
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
On the Studio only
CONNECTORS
Power (24 V) for the Heated Eyecup and the Work Light is supplied via two co-axial connectors.
On the Studio only
ACCESSORY ATTACHMENT
The two threaded sockets and two gauged holes on top of the camera left side allow mounting of several accessories including a bracket for Steadicam, a similar support system or the modular ARRICAM Carrying Handle
System.
The cameras’ control panels
On both, the Studio and the Lite, most of the functions are controlled and monitored by means of the Camera
Control Panels. These Panels are located on the camera left side to be easily accessible and visible for the operator and the focus puller. There are two types of Control
Panel in circulation: The original Standard Camera
Control Panel and the newer Extended Camera Control
Panel. (The Standard may be upgraded to an Extended through a workshop procedure).
The Studio and the Lite Standard Control Panels are equipped with FPS push wheel input units. On the
Extended Camera Control Panels, FPS and Shutter opening are set by means of finger operated buttons instead of recessed ones that require a small poited tool to operate. Furthermore, the Studio Extended Camera Control
Panel has a third display to show the film length.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
31
The Extended Camera Control Panels also allow the user to select several settings offered in the display options’ menu.
BASICS
All messages shown on the displays of several components (Camera Body, Accessory Boxes, Video Assists,
Readout Unit, etc.) are generated by computer software
(SW). Together with a firmware (FW), the software is integrated in the camera bodies and several system components.
Depending on the type of Camera Control Panel
(Standard or Extended), different indications and messages will be shown on the FPS display. As with other computer systems, and based on the feedback by
ARRICAM Users, the software and also the firmware will be updated when necessary. Therefore it is advisable to know the version of the software and firmware installed in your camera.
Also when requesting information, the technician will ask you the software and firmware version number. Last but not least, is also necessary to be aware that some messages can be changed without notice when the system is updated. This User’s Guide is updated to cover the release of version 03E.
Because some messages are exclusively for the
ARRICAM Maintenance Personnel, they are not listed in this Users’ Guide.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
32
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
OPERATIONS
The Option mode allows the user
• to define the threshold voltage value that must be reached to initiate the low battery warning.
• to check the software/firmware version installed in the system components.
Extended Camera Control Panel
fig.1/14
A C
B D
Setting the threshold voltage of the low battery warning
To set the threshold voltage of the low battery warning, first turn OFF the camera power. Then, enter the Option mode by holding the BRIGHT button on the Camera
Control Panel (camera left side) pressed and turn ON the camera MAIN switch.
Now the following messages will be displayed: display: shutter FPS Footage text:
LBat NiCd
or
User
Nicd
shows that the low battery warning is set to a default value for Nickel Cadmium batteries. This default value is set in the factory and cannot be changed by the users.
If a Lithium Ion or 26.2 volt NiCad battery is used, a different low battery voltage is needed. To change it, select the
User
mode by pushing the button “C” or “D” – see fig. 1/14 above.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
33
When
User
is displayed, pushing the button “B” will change the display as follows: display: shutter FPS Footage text:
LBat V21.7
User
By pushing the buttons “C” or “D”, the threshold voltage can be set anywhere from 20.0 V to 29.9 V.
To save the change of the threshold value in the system, either push the PHASE button on the Extended Camera Control Panel or switch OFF and ON the camera
MAIN switch.
While pushing the PHASE button, the actual voltage of the power supply will appear on the FPS display.
Checking the software and firmware version installed in several components
To find out which SW or FW version is actually installed, first turn OFF the camera power, then, enter the Option mode by holding the BRIGHT button on the
Camera Control Panel pressed (camera left side) and turn ON the camera MAIN switch.
Now the following messages will be displayed: display: shutter FPS Footage text:
LBat NiCd
or
User
By pushing button “B”, the display will change as follows: display: shutter FPS Footage text:
CLD V100 SW
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
34
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
This means that the Software Version 100 has been installed in the Camera Control Panel. (CLD=Camera
Left Display) By pushing either “C” or “D”, the display will change to a next component or to FW if SW is already shown.
display: shutter FPS Footage text:
SCB 104c FW
Caution!
If a figure (software or firmware version) shown on the FPS display is blinking, it means that the installed software/firmware is incompatible with other software/firmware already installed.
Whenever this happens, push the PHASE button to clear the warning.
Notice
Only in case of a very serious problem (risk of damaging the camera, risk of wrong film exposure) will the RUN LED glow red to indicate that the camera is not ready to shoot. In this case, call your ARRICAM
Maintenance Centre.
Usually, a software/firmware incompatibility will not affect the system and the camera will stay ready to shoot. However, the indication of the incompatibility will appear each time the camera is turned ON. This is to remind you to consult a Maintenance Centre as soon as you can. When the warning is displayed, basic camera functions (correct exposure & film handling) will still work although some accessories may not.
To leave the Option mode, push either the PHASE button or switch the camera MAIN switch OFF and ON.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
35
OPERATING THE EXTENDED CAMERA CONTROL
PANEL
In order to set fps or shutter angle on the Extended
Camera Control Panels, hold the unlock button while pushing the selectors’ buttons. Otherwise
LOCK
will appear in the related display when a setting button is pushed.
ACRONYMS
SCB
MCB
TSB
LDB
LDD
WRC
ISB
CCB
SW
FW
CLD
speed control box
manual control box
timing shift box
lens data box
lens data display
wireless remote control
in-camera slate box
camera control box (ARRIMOTION/Jogbox)
software
firmware
camera left display (Camera Control Panel)
RUN BUTTON
Provided that the main power supply is switched ON and the camera is READY (e.g. film is laced correctly, power supply is ok), the camera will start to RUN when either the RUN button on the Camera Control Panel or one of the other RUN buttons, e.g. on the Handgrip, on the Speed Control Box or on a remote control unit is pressed. Any of those RUN buttons can be employed alternately to change the status of the camera RUN or
STOP and vice versa.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
36
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
RUN LED INDICATOR
The RUN LED is off while the camera is in Standby or not powered. When the camera is started, the RUN LED will glow red while the camera is coming up to speed, changing to green once the camera is RUNNING at the preset frame rate. When a RUN button is pushed again to stop the camera, the RUN LED will glow red while the camera SLOWS DOWN, going out when the camera has stopped RUNNING.
Notice
If the RUN LED glows red while the camera is not
RUNNING, it indicates that the camera is NOT
READY. – pushing a RUN button will have no effect.
If the camera is powered, the cause why the camera is not in Standby status will be displayed on the FPS displays – see page 44.
FPS SELECTOR
While the camera is NOT RUNNING, frame rates from 1 to 40 (Lite) or 1 to 60 (Studio) can be preset.
If a higher rate is erroneously preset and the RUN button is pressed, the camera will not start to RUN and the display will show
FPS!
.
Notice
If an SCB is connected to the camera and it’s SPEED
CONTROL switch is set to ON, the FPS selector on the camera left side is put overridden and either
SCB
will show on the FPS display of the Standard Camera
Control Panel or the value preset on the SCB will show on the FPS display of the Extended Camera Control
Panel while the camera is Standby. As soon as the camera is RUNNING, the actual fps rate will be shown.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
37
Studio Standard Camera Control Panel
fig.1/15
RUN LED
SHUTTER angle selector
SHUTTER angle display
FPS display
FPS selector
RUN button
PHASE button
Studio Extended Camera Control Panel
fig.1/16
BRIGHT button
UNLOCK button
RUN button
SHUTTER angle selector
PHASE button
SHUTTER angle display
FPS selector
RAW STOCK button
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
38
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
FPS display
RUN LED
FPS selector
RESET button
Film length display
11/2003
Lite Standard Camera Control Panel
fig.1/17
RUN LED
PHASE button
RUN button
Lite Extended Camera Control Panel
fig.1/18
Film length display
RESET button
Battery LED
SHUTTER angle selector
SHUTTER angle display
FPS display
FPS selector
RAW STOCK button
UNLOCK button
Film length display
RESET button
SHUTTER angle selector
BRIGHT button
RUN button
RUN LED
PHASE button
SHUTTER angle display
FPS selector
FPS display
FPS selector
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
39
One advantage of the Extended Camera Control Panels is that you can also enter the following preset frame rates: shown on control panel real setting
6.2 fps 6.25 fps
12.5 fps 12.5 fps
16.6 fps 16.666 fps
23.9 fps 23.976 fps
29.9 fps 29.97 fps
33.3 fps 33.333 fps
All settings are only possible while the camera is not
RUNNING.
RUN
will appear in the related display if a setting button is pushed while the camera is RUNNING.
If a component such as the SCB, the MCB or the WRC has control over the shutter opening, no setting of the shutter angle is possible by means of the Camera
Control Panel buttons and the controlling device will be displayed.
SHUTTER ANGLE SELECTOR
While the camera is in STANDBY, you may change the shutter angle either by pushing with a pointed item
– e.g. toothpick – the little selector protected by the Plexiglas cover on the Standard Camera Control Panel or by pushing the button on the Extended one. As soon as one is pushed, the shutter advances to the new setting.
The value cycles through the following steps:
11.2° 22.5° 30° 43.2° 45° 60° 75° 86.4°
90° 105° 120° 135° 144° 150° 172.8° 180°
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
40
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
PHASE BUTTON
Depending on the status of the camera, the PHASE button allows two different operations.
When the camera is in STANDBY:
While pressing the PHASE button continuously, the
INCHING mode is activated and the movement will
RUN at 1 FPS as long as the button is held down.
When the button is released, the mirror shutter will automatically park in the viewing position.
While the camera RUNS in the INCHING mode the power supply voltage will be displayed in the FPS display as e.g.
V 24.6
.
When the camera is RUNNING: pushing the PHASE button will increase the preset FPS rate by 0.2 fps as long as the button is held down. This also works when e.g. the SCB or another remote device controls the fps rate.
Exceptions:
While the camera is controlled
• by an SCB, the SCB switch is set to SYNC and the
PHASE switch is set to FIXED,
• by a Video Assist external synchronization signal.
• by an In-camera Slate Box synchronization signal.
• by an external device and RUNNING a SPEED
RAMP the PHASE button is inactive. When it is pushed, the FPS display will show
FIXD
as long as the button is held pressed.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
41
RAWSTOCK
While the camera is in STANDBY press and hold the
RAWSTOCK button to display the film reserve as set by the magazine.
BAT LED INDICATOR
The bat LED (Lite Standard Camera Control Panel only) lights up red in case the supply voltage drops below the threshold value defined in the option mode. The same indication is provided on the other Camera Control Panels by a warning message on the FPS display.
FPS DISPLAY
Regarding the brightness control of displays
Many components of the ARRICAM System are fitted with similar displays. The brightness of all these displays can be adjusted to the needs of the users by means of the dimmers located e.g. on the Speed Control Box, on the Manual Control Box or on the Studio Readout. The adjustment of the display brightness will automatically affect all components connected to the camera body, so individual adjustment for each display is not possible.
Regarding the messages shown on the FPS displays
All messages described on the following pages are generated by the ARRICAM SW Version 3.0E When requesting information from ARRICAM Maintenance
Technicians, please mention the version of the software installed on your camera. (see Checking the Software and Firmware section on page 34)
If another accessory has control over the camera the
Extended Camera Control Panel shows what speed the
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
42
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
camera will run on its FPS display. At the same time, the controlling component is shown e.g on the Studio Readout. As soon as you attempt to change the FPS value on the Extended Camera Control Panel, its FPS display will show the component which actually controls the camera
(e.g. MCB, SCB, WRC) – no changes will be possible there.
The four digit display marked FPS will not only show the actual frame rate while the camera is RUNNING, but will also serve as an important central information display. Warning messages will alternate with the fps values. If there is more than one warning message, they will alternate at a two seconds frequency.
When there is no reason for displaying warning messages, the FPS displays will inform about the following status.
Notice
As soon as the camera detects that the software of any of the system components (e.g. Lens Data Box,
Video Assist) is incompatible, the warning
SW
will appear on the FPS displays and the camera will go to NOT READY. Simultaneously,
Phse
will appear on the SHUTTER displays. By pushing one of the PHASE buttons, the warnings will disappear and the camera goes to Standby. The warnings will appear automatically when the camera is powered ON in order to remind you to ask an ARRICAM Maintenance Centre to up-date the system as soon as possible.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
43
MESSAGE
Explanation of the message, glows
(
MESSAGE
) Explanation of the message, glows alternately with an other message
(
(
MESSAGE
)
) Explanation of the message, blinks
‹‹
MESSAGE
›› Explanation of the message, blinks fast
RUNNING
REMARK
ponent has control over the camera.
LIST OF MESSAGES AND WARNINGS on the FPS display
(Software Version 3.0E)
FPS DISPLAY
Camera is not powered.
....
REMARK
Electronic problem.
An electronic problem occurs that can only be fixed by Maintenance Technicians.
running point
REMARK
Electronic problem.
An electronic problem occurs that can only be fixed by Maintenance Technicians.
0.0
STANDBY
Camera is not RUNNING.
Camera is ready to shoot with the preset fps shown on the FPS selector (Standard Camera
Control Panel) or displayed (Extended Camera
Control Panel).
24.0
Camera is RUNNING.
RUNNING
Camera is RUNNING with the preset fps
(e.g. 24 fps).
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
44
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
FPS DISPLAY
-12.0
Camera is RUNNING REVERSE.
RUNNING
The camera is RUNNING REVERSE with the preset fps (e.g. 12 fps).
Asy
Asynchronity.
RUNNING
Camera RUNS at another fps than the preset rate.
(
( Bat )
) Battery low.
NOT READY
The power source does not supply the requested voltage.
RUNNING
If the camera cannot reach the preset fps rate,
Bat
and the current fps rate will alternatively light up on the display.
See more – chapter 10, page 363.
(
( Bukl )
) Buckle trip.
NOT READY
At least one of the buckle trip switches has been tripped.
(
CAL
) Lens calibration in progress
STANDBY
CAL
alternates with
FPS
or further warning message.
RUNNING
CAL
alternates with
FPS
or further warning message.
CCB
STANDBY
Camera Control Box.
The ARRIMOTION CCB controls the camera.
–CCB
STANDBY
Camera Control Box.
The ARRIMOTION CCB controls the camera for shooting REVERSE.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
45
FPS DISPLAY
(
Covr
) Dual Port Adapter Cover is missing.
While a magazine is mounted on the Dual
Port Adapter, the remaining adapter open-
STANDBY
ing is not light tight because the Dual Port
Adapter special Aluminium Cover is missing.
ATTENTION: camera remains in Standby even if the Dual Port Adapter Cover is missing!
Covr
alternates with
FPS
or further warning messages.
RUNNING
ATTENTION: camera can RUN even when the Dual Port Adapter Cover is missing!
Covr
alternates with
FPS
or further warning messages.
(
(
DC
)
) Dust check.
NOT READY
The DUST CHECK or PHASE button has been pushed while the camera is STAND
BY.
(
Door
) Lite Magazine to Studio Camera Adapter
door is not closed.
STANDBY
RUNNING
Camera remains in Standby.
Door
alternates with
FPS
or further warning messages.
Camera continues to RUN.
Door
alternates with
FPS
or further warning messages.
End
Film end warning.
STANDBY
Less than 6 m/20 ft unexposed film remain in the magazine.
End
will alternate with
RUNNING
0.0
.
Less than 6 m/20 ft unexposed film remain in the magazine.
End
will alternate with actual fps e.g.:
24.0
.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
46
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
FPS DISPLAY
Fixd
No manual phase.
RUNNING
The PHASE button has been pushed while the SPEED CONTROL switch on the SCB is set on SYNC mode and the PHASE switch has been set to FIXED.
(
( FPS!
)
) Wrong preset fps.
STAND BY
An fps rate below or above the fps range of the camera has been preset.
(
( !FW!
)
) Firmware updating.
STANDBY
Firmware incompatibility.
NOT READY
Camera is not ready to shoot.
(
( !SW!
)
) Software updating.
STANDBY
Software incompatibility.
NOT READY
Camera is NOT READY.
(
( Hbat )
) The power supply voltage is too high.
NOT READY
RUNNING
Camera is not ready.
The camera stops RUNNING and all cam-
REMARK
era components will be shut OFF.
This message will only be displayed on the
FPS display on the Camera Control Panel.
Heat
STANDBY
Camera Heater is ON.
The shutter value will alternate with
Heat
.
NOT READY
to show that the Heater is ON.
Camera remains in Standby.
RUNNING
By pushing the RUN button, the camera should start to RUN. If not, the camera is not warm enough to ensure correct running.
While the camera is RUNNING, the Camera
H eater turns itself OFF.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
47
FPS DISPLAY
(
( Jam )
) Guides, jam.
NOT READY
At least one sprocket guide is open or a film jam has occurred.
(
( Mag )
) There is a problem with the magazine or
NOT READY
magazine adapter.
Camera is not ready.
MCB
STANDBY
Manual Control Box controls camera.
An MCB has control over the camera.
-MCB
STANDBY
Manual Control Box controls camera.
An MCB has control over the camera and the REVERSE shooting mode has been selected on the SCB.
( m/ft
) A magazine with a unit of measurement
different to its predecessor has been mounted.
STANDBY m/ft
alternates with
FPS
or further warning messages. Acknowledge by pressing PHASE or change the unit of measurement.
Movm
Movement open.
NOT READY
The movement block is not in the fully closed position.
(
( M/S!
)
) Movement/shutter async.
RUNNING
The mirror shutter and the movement have lost synchronization.
(
( MTmp )
) Movement motor has overheated due to
overload.
STANDBY
The camera goes into
NOT READY
Wait for motor to cool down.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
48
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
FPS DISPLAY
(
( Out )
) Stock out.
NOT READY
RUNNING
Shows that no film is left.
The camera stops and goes to NOT READY
REMARK
the RUN LED will glow red.
To reset, take the magazine off.
(
RAMP
) Ramping problem.
NOT READY
Alternates with FPS or messages like SCB,
WRC, etc.
Check ramp values, at least, one of the settings is out of the possible range.
(
( Rev!
)
) REVERSE RUN not possible.
STANDBY
When REV is selected while an LT Mag. is used,
Rev!
will show the incompatibility.
SCB
STANDBY
Speed Control Box controls camera.
An SCB has control over the camera.
– SCB
STANDBY
Speed Control Box controls camera.
An SCB has control over the camera and the REVERSE shooting mode has been selected.
(
( Spd!
)
) The camera has exceeded its speed limit.
RUNNING
The camera stops and goes into
NOT READY
.
Pressing the PHASE button resets the warning.
(
( SW )
) Software incompatibility.
NOT READY
Appears simultaneously with
Phse
warning on the SHUTTER display.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
49
FPS DISPLAY
(
Syn
) Synchronization.
STANDBY
SCB controls the camera to RUN FWD (for-
RUNNING
ward) and the SPEED CONTROL switch is set to SYNC but no valid sync signal is present.
Camera changes to NOT READY.
ATTENTION: Alternates with actual fps even though the synchronization fails!
(
–Syn
) Synchronization.
STANDBY
SCB controls the camera to RUN REVERSE and the SPEED CONTROL switch is set to
RUNNING
SYNC but no valid sync signal is present.
Camera changes to NOT READY.
ATTENTION: Alternates with actual fps even though the synchronization fails!
(
TcSy
) Synchronization.
STANDBY
The In-camera Slate Box is set in SYNC mode but there is no valid input signal present.
RUNNING
Camera changes to NOT READY.
ATTENTION: Alternates with actual fps even though the synchronization fails!
REMARK
No REV filming is possible when
TcSy
is displayed.
(
(
Time
)
) The camera has timed out after 350m of continuous running to prevent it running indefinitely.
STANDBY
Camera is NOT READY. This can be
cleared by pressing the PHASE button.
RUNNING
The camera stops and goes into NOT
READY.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
50
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
FPS DISPLAY
(
( TkUp )
) The take up side of the magazine has no tension.
NOT READY
RUNNING
Camera is NOT READY.
The magazine feed side has tension but the take up side RUNS free. Most likely the film has not been attached correctly to the take up core. Reload the magazine.
Updt
Software updating.
STANDBY
Software update in progress.
NOT READY
Camera is NOT READY.
V 24.6
Camera is INCHING.
NOT READY
Camera is NOT READY.
RUNNING
While the PHASE button on the Camera
Control Panel is pressed down, the camera is INCHING and the actual voltage
(e.g. 24.6 V dc) is displayed.
V 3.3
In-camera Slate Box power management.
The ISB battery voltage (e.g. 3.3 V) will appear while the TEST button on the
In-Camera Slate Box is pushed.
(
ViSy
) Synchronization.
STANDBY
The Video Assist IVS controls the synchroni zation of the camera but there is no valid input signal present.
RUNNING
Camera changes to NOT READY.
ATTENTION: Alternates with actual fps even though the synchronization fails!
REMARK
No REV filming is possible when
ViSy
is displayed
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
51
FPS DISPLAY
Wind
Magazine is taking up loose film.
NOT READY
RUNNING
Camera is NOT READY.
Either there is no film in the magazine, the
REMARK
whole exposed film is still in the magazine or, most likely, the film head has come out of the take up core. Reload the magazine.
If an empty magazine is mounted on the camera,
Wind
appears as soon as the camera is powered – the camera is NOT
READY. The message will fade out after about 25 sec. with a 120/400 Mag. or about 35 sec. with a 300/1000 Mag.
Notice
Only when
Wind
fades out, you will be able to start the camera.
Caution!
Do not turn the camera ON when a loaded magazine is mounted but the film is not threaded.
For testing purposes without film, either remove the loaded magazine or mount an empty magazine on the camera.
WRC
STANDBY
WRC controls the camera.
A Wireless Remote Control has control over the camera.
– WRC
STANDBY
WRC controls the camera.
A Wireless Remote Control has control over the camera and the REVERSE shooting mode has been selected.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
52
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
FURTHER MESSAGES ARE ONLY DISPLAYED ON THE
EXTENDED CAMERA CONTROL PANELS
FPS DISPLAY/EXTENDED CAMERA CONTROL PANEL ONLY
‹‹
CCB
›› CCB controls the camera.
STANDBY
No fps adjustment is possible on the Camera Control Panel because ARRIMOTION
CCB/Jogbox controls the camera.
‹‹
– CCB
›› CCB controls the camera.
STANDBY
No REVERSE fps adjustment is possible because ARRIMOTION CCB/Jogbox controls the camera.
LOCK
STANDBY
Camera Control Panel is locked.
Press the UNLOCK button to adjust the fps.
‹‹
MCB
›› MCB controls the camera.
STANDBY
No fps adjustment is possible on the Camera Control Panel because MCB controls the camera.
‹‹
– MCB
›› MCB controls the camera.
STANDBY
No REVERSE fps adjustment is possible because MCB controls the camera.
RUN
Camera is RUNNING.
RUNNING
No fps adjustment is possible while the camera is RUNNING.
‹‹
SCB
›› SCB controls the camera.
STANDBY
No fps adjustment is possible on the Panel because SCB controls the camera.
‹‹
– SCB
›› SCB controls the camera.
STANDBY
No fps adjustment is possible because SCB controls the camera.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
53
FPS DISPLAY/EXTENDED CAMERA CONTROL PANEL ONLY
‹‹
Syn
›› SCB is in SYNC mode.
STANDBY
No adjustment of the fps is possible because the Speed Control Box SCB controls the camera to RUN FORWARD and the
SPEED CONTROL switch is set to SYNC.
‹‹
– Syn
›› SCB is in SYNC mode.
STANDBY
No adjustment of the fps is possible because the Speed Control Box SCB controls the camera to RUN REVERSE and the
SPEED CONTROL switch is set to SYNC.
‹‹
TcSy
›› ISB is active and SCB is in SYNC mode.
STANDBY
No adjustment of the fps is possible because the In-camera Slate Box ISB controls the camera and the SPEED CONTROL switch is set to SYNC.
‹‹
ViSy
›› IVS controls the camera.
STANDBY
No adjustment of the fps is possible because Video Assist IVS controls the camera.
‹‹
WRC
›› WRC controls the camera.
STANDBY
No fps adjustment is possible on the Camera Control Panel because WRC controls the camera.
‹‹
– WRC
›› WRC controls the camera.
STANDBY
No REVERSE fps adjustment is possible on the SCB because WRC controls the camera.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
54
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
LIST OF MESSAGES AND WARNINGS ON THE
SHUTTER DISPLAY (Software Version 3.0E)
SHUTTER DISPLAY
As long as the camera is Standby and the SHUTTER SET button is pushed, the display will show the preset value.
While the camera is RUNNING, the SHUTTER display will automatically show the actual shutter opening angle.
Beside this, the SHUTTER display is also used to show further information.
ISB0
Shutter closed.
RUNNING
The In-camera Slate System is ON, the camera RUNS UP or DOWN, and the mirror shutter is set to 0 degrees.
(
( CCB )
) CCB controls the camera.
STANDBY
No shutter adjustment is possible on the
Camera Control Panel because ARRI-
MOTION CCB controls the camera.
(
(
Err
)
) Shutter problem.
STANDBY
Shutter error. The actual shutter angle does not equal the preset shutter setting.
NOT READY
When a shutter error occurs, the camera stops and changes to NOT READY.
Lock
STANDBY
Camera Control Panel is locked.
Press UNLOCK button to change the shutter setting.
(
(
MCB
)
) MCB controls the camera.
STANDBY
No shutter adjustment is possible on the
Camera Control Panel because MCB controls the camera.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
55
SHUTTER DISPLAY
(
( Run )
) Camera is RUNNING.
RUNNING
The shutter adjustment is not possible while the camera is RUNNING.
(
( SCB )
) SCB controls the camera.
STANDBY
No shutter adjustment is possible on the
Camera Control Panel because SCB controls the camera.
(
TSB
) The Timing Shift Box TSB is operational.
STANDBY
Alternates with shutter angle.
RUNNING
Alternates with shutter angle.
(
( WRC )
) WRC controls the camera.
STANDBY
No shutter adjustment is possible on the
Camera Control Panel because WRC controls the camera.
REMARK: The following message will not be displayed on the Extended Camera Control Panel.
(
MCB
) Shutter selector is pushed while the Manual
Control Box MCB switch is set to control the shutter.
STANDBY
Alternates with shutter angle.
RUNNING
Alternates with shutter angle.
(
( Phse )
) Software incompatibility.
NOT READY
Appears simultaneously with the
SW
warning in the FPS display.
REMARK: By pushing one of the PHASE buttons the camera goes in STAND BY status.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
56
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
The cameras’ top
On Studio & Lite
EXCHANGEABLE ENGRAVED VIEWFINDER
MOUNTING PLATE
The engraved Viewfinder Mounting Plate shows the format the camera has been set to – either STANDARD 35 or SUPER 35 format – see fig. 1/19.
Notice
The adjustment should be done by trained personnel of ARRICAM Maintenance Centres or rental houses.
If, for some reason, you have to change the format of the camera, please see the description of the procedure in chapter 11 – Miscellaneous.
When attaching a viewfinder, carefully line up the pins on the base of the viewfinder with the holes on the
Viewfinder Mounting Plate. Be sure that both plugs connect easily.
Viewfinder Mounting Plate
fig.1/19
Viewfinder attachments
(threaded holes)
Format label
Viewfinder attachments
(gauged holes)
On Studio & Lite
ADJUSTING SCREWS
Caution!
Do not touch the adjusting screws – they must be used by technicians of the ARRICAM Maintenance Centres only!
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
57
Studio top
fig.1/20
Viewfinder connector
Viewfinder window
Tape
hook
Lens cap
Viewfinder mounting plate
Dovetail bracket for accessories
Magazine adapter attachment
Adjustable door hinge
Lite top
fig.1/21
CAC connector
Connector for the magazine adapters
Lens cap
Viewfinder mounting plate
Viewfinder connector
Door hinge
Tape
hook
Viewfinder window
Attachment for accessories
Release knob for magazines/adapter
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
58
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
On the Studio only
MAGAZINE ADAPTER ATTACHEMENT
The magazine adapters are fixed to the Studio body by six screws. Firmly screw them into the threaded sockets on the camera top.
Notice
The two screws in the middle of the adapter should be tightened first! (As indicated on the adapter.)
On the Studio only
CONNECTOR FOR THE MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
This connector provides communication between the magazines and the Studio.
On the Lite only
FIXTURE FOR CARRYING HANDLE AND UNIVERSAL
LOW MODE SET
Several fixtures are provided for mounting either Carrying Handles or the Universal Low Mode Set or similar support system. For mounting instruction see chapter 9
– Camera Supports.
RELEASE-KNOB FOR MAGAZINE UNLOCKING
To remove a camera opening cover, an Lite Magazine or either of the Lite Magazine Adapters, push the
RELEASE knob and, while holding it pressed down, carefully pull the magazine sideways out of the Lite body.
Caution!
Do not touch the adjusting screws!
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
59
The camera bodies’ bases
When mounting the camera on a head or a Baseplate, be sure that both plates, the gauged holes and the threaded sockets are clean. When using the Power
Bridgeplate, slide the cover on the base of the cameraback to allow the supply of power to the contacts provided on the plate.
Caution!
Before fixing the camera, please check that the
3/8” tightening screws will not penetrate the camera base more than 0.27” or 7 mm.
Both camera bases are similar.
Caution!
Any screws not previously described are strictly reserved for Maintenance Technicians only! Do not touch any of these adjusting screws!
Lite base Studio base
fig.1/22
Threaded holes
Gauged holes
Sliding cover of the power connectors
Attachment for shoulder pad
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
60
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
The camera bodies’ interiors
Despite the different sizes of the cameras’ interiors, both cameras are equipped with similar components.
THE MOVEMENT
Either a 4 or 3 perforation pull-down movement can be installed in both camera bodies by trained Maintenance
Technicians. Both movements are fitted with similar operational items. By turning the movement locking lever clockwise, the movement will slide back into the loading position. By turning the lever counter-clockwise, the movement block will slide forwards to the Aperture Plate and finally lock in place.
Caution!
• Before sliding the movement to the loading position, turn the INCHING knob until the index is in the LOOP position.
• In order to secure the movement in its shooting position, push the lever counter-clockwise to overcome a mechanical resistance with a click, which will hold the movement firmly in this front shooting position.
Movement
fig.1/23
Spacer plate
Front film guide
Spacer plate handle
Spacer plate safety spring
Movement locking lever
Inching knob
Movement adjustment screw
Pitch adjustment screw
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
61
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
62
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
THE PITCH ADJUSTMENT SCREW
In order to adjust the movement to the properties and dimensions of the film material in use, and at the same time achieve the quietest and most gentle film transport, the pitch can be controlled. The PITCH Adjustment screw has marks and buffer stops; the adjusting range is a narrow segment of a screw turn. While the camera is running at the normal frame rate (24 or 25 fps), slowly turn the PITCH Adjustment screw with a 3 mm metric hex wrench back and forth until the noise level reaches its minimum. In this position, the camera RUNS smoothly and quitely. This PITCH Adjustment should be repeated whenever the raw stock type is changed.
THE MOVEMENT ADJUSTMENT SCREW (FW/REV)
Because some Black & White films have unusual mechanical properties, it is recommended to set the movement to REV, in order to obtain the optimum steadiness when shooting in REVERSE with these materials.
To do so, turn the screw with a 3 mm metric hex wrench.
THE INCHING KNOB
The large knurled knob allows manual INCHING of the camera. Be aware that turning this INCHING knob will only move the pull-down claws and register pins but not move the shutter. While the camera is powered, the film in the magazine is tensioned automatically. If you want to prevent this, e.g. when threading the camera, first move one of the buckle trips out of its rest position.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
63
THE APERTURE PLATE
These Aperture Plates are made of extremely hard material; the film touches the Plate only in the perforation area. The openings for the registration pins are located left and right of the gate. A side guide rail is attached to the Aperture Plate right side. Clean the Aperture Plate carefully and regularly. Only when it is badly smudged
– which will rarely be the case when handled meticulously – you should clean it very carefully with a small brush or a toothpick.
Caution!
Never lubricate the Aperture Plate!
The film gate with the Aperture Format Mask and Filter
Holder is integrated in the Aperture Plate. A set with several Aperture Format Masks is available. If it is intended to shoot with open gate, it is recommended to use the Universal Aperture Format Mask in order to avoid the risk of image overlapping and flare.
Aperture Plate
fig.1/25
Gate in-camera slate window
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
64
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
UNIVERSAL (open gate)
1 : 1.33 Full aperture (ANSI)
1 : 1.375 Academy
1 : 1.66
1 : 1.85
1 : 2.35
S35 / 1 : 1.78
S35 / 1 : 1.85 (ANSI)
S35 / 1 : 1.85 (Asymmetric)
S35 / 1 : 2.35 (ANSI)
MOUNTING AND REMOVING THE APERTURE PLATE
In order to check the gate, to exchange a Aperture
Format Mask or a filter, the Aperture Plate must be removed from the camera body.
To extract the Aperture Plate:
1. turn the camera MAIN switch OFF
2. turn the INCHING knob until its marking matches the
LOOP index
3. swing the movement locking lever clockwise until the movement reaches its rear position
4. lift the Aperture Plate locking lever while holding the black handle of the Aperture Format Mask in order to avoid that the Aperture Plate hits the movement block
5. take hold of the Aperture Plate by the Aperture Format
Mask handle, lift it and extract the Aperture Plate.
Caution!
• The surfaces where the Aperture Plate meets the camera body must be meticulously clean – any dirt might alter the flange focal distance.
• In case the Aperture Plate is slanting, start inserting again.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
65
Studio Interior
fig.1/26
Aperture plate locking lever
To insert the Aperture Plate:
While holding the Aperture Format Mask handle, insert the Aperture Plate on the mouting rail. Gently press it forward while lifting the spring loaded Aperture Plate locking lever. As soon as it is in place, bring the lever back to its resting position (=lock) again. You can only insert the Aperture Plate parallel to the shaft!
Notice
For mounting, the Aperture Plate has a V-shaped notch at its bottom edge. This notch must be absolutely clean to make sure the Aperture Plate can be seated properly.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
66
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Studio Interior
fig.1/27
Aperture plate v-shaped notch
Caution!
When inserting the Aperture Plate in the camera, be sure that the locking lever completely returns fully.
The correct resting position is flush with the Plate.
THE APERTURE FORMAT MASKS AND FILTER HOLDER
Caution!
• An Aperture Format Mask and a Filter Holder must always be inserted in the Aperture Plate.
• The Aperture Plate can only be locked if the
Filter Holder and the Aperture Format Mask are correctly inserted.
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
67
To remove a Aperture Format Mask or a Filter Holder:
1. remove the Aperture Plate from the camera body
2. pull the Filter Holder sideways out of the Aperture
Plate
3. press the Aperture Format Mask lightly on its side flap towards the film gate and then pull it out sideways
To insert a Aperture Format Mask or a Filter Holder:
1. check that the Aperture Plate and the contact surface are absolutely clean
2. push the new Aperture Format Mask sideways into the Aperture Plate
3. check that the film gate is perfectly clean
4. insert (or preferably not) a gelatine filter into the
Holder and cut it appropriately
5. check meticulously if the filter is free of imperfection, dust, dirt, fingerprint, etc.
6. push the Filter Holder behind the Aperture Format
Mask into the Aperture Plate
7. insert the Aperture Plate into the camera body.
Aperture Plate
fig.1/28
Filter holder
Aperture
Format Mask
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
68
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Notice
• Sliding the movement block forwards when the
Aperture Plate is not correctly in place can cause damage to the camera!
• The presence of a filter in the film gate will be shown on the Lens Data Display and on the System
Line on the video monitor.
Caution!
• Be careful not to damage Aperture Plate or gate
– this might have serious consequences!
• Unless absolutely necessary, avoid placing a gelatine filter in the film gate. Even a microscopic air bubble or speck of dirt will be seen extremely enlarged on the screen.
• If there is no other alternative and you have to use a filter in the gate, do not forget to clearly mark the type of filter inserted in the camera.
THE IN-CAMERA SLATE WINDOW
The Aperture Plate has two slots for the pull-down claws and a round window that allows the exposing of the
In-camera Slate on the film. The slots as well as the surface of the Aperture Plate and the little window must always be clean – check regularly.
THE SPACER PLATE
In the centre of the front film guide, there is an opening for the Spacer Plate. This Plate – held firmly in place by magnets – has raised surfaces that hold the film in the gate plane. Smudged surfaces may cause film scratches!
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
69
To clean the Spacer Plate, it must be removed first
1. slide the movement to its rear position.
2. press the safety spring fixture downwards, at the same time press the Spacer Plate backwards by its handle.
3. remove the Spacer Plate by pulling it upwards
4. check Spacer Plate thoroughly and – if necessary – clean it with lint-free cloth or a toothpick. Also clean the rear of the Spacer Plate.
Caution!
While manipulating the Spacer Plate, great care must be taken not to touch the Aperture Plate and the gate with the Spacer Plate. If you take the
Spacer Plate out of the camera, it is paramount to slide the movement to its rear position before removing or inserting the Plate.
To install the Spacer Plate
1. take hold of the Spacer Plate by its handle and insert it at an angle from above into the movement block.
2. push the Spacer Plate downwards until it locks audibly in place.
Spacer Plate
fig.1/29
1 – THE CAMERA BODIES
70
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
The Four ARRICAM Magazines
Convention: In the following description, the cover is considered being the magazine front. So a mounted magazine will have the latches on the camera left side.
All ARRICAM Magazines are built to ensure the smoothest and quietest operation possible. Therefore high-end electronics and mechanical components have been assembled in rugged but lightweight shells. Due to the characteristics of the material used and the special treatment of the surfaces, temperatures up to 40° C/
104° F will not affect proper operation of the ARRICAM
Equipment. If the ambient temperature drops below -10°
C/-14° F, thermostatically controlled heaters will automatically ensure an adequate temperature in the cameras and the Studio Magazines. In case of heavy frost, a
Heated Barney will help. Motors, heater and digital footage counter are located at the rear of the magazines.
The roller assemblies contain three or four rollers. Roller bearings should be serviced at an ARRICAM Maintenance Centres only. The roller assembly is best cleaned with a small vacuum cleaner.
The ARRICAM System includes four application specific magazines.
1. Studio Magazine 300/1000 for Studio and Lite
2. Studio Magazine 120/400 for Studio and Lite
3. Lite Shoulder Magazine for Lite and Studio
4. Lite Steadicam Magazine for Lite and Studio
Caution!
No other ARRI or MOVIECAM Magazine can be used with the ARRICAM Cameras.
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
73
Studio Magazine 300/1000 fig.2/1
Studio Magazine 120/400 fig.2/2
Lite Shoulder Magazine fig.2/3
Lite Steadicam Magazine fig.2/4
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
74
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
The two main differences between the Studio and Lite
Magazines are that only the Studio Magazines allow filming in REVERSE mode and they are equipped with heaters.
Both Studio Magazines allow FORWARD filming from 1 to 40 fps on the Lite and from 1 to 60 fps with the
Studio. With both cameras, the Studio Magazines allow shooting REVERSE from 1 to 32 fps.
Notice
• When using the Studio with a Steadicam, no special magazine is needed because of the orientation of the Back Load Adapter.
• To mount Studio Magazines on the Studio, one of the three magazine adapters is necessary – see fig. 2/15 and 2/16 on page 86.
• To use Studio Magazines on the Lite, the Studio
Mag to Lite Camera Adapter must be used – see fig. 2/28 on page 97.
• To use the Lite Magazines on the Studio, the Lite
Mag to Studio Camera Adapter must be used
– see fig. 2/18 on page 87.
• Lite Magazines mount directly on the Lite without any adapters – see fig. 2/28 on page 97.
Because of the size of the Studio Magazine 300/1000, secure it when the equipment is used in high g-force conditions by mounting the Magazine Stabilization Bracket.
Magazine Stabilization Bracket fig.2/5
Magazine
Stabilization
Bracket
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
75
CARE & CLEANING
Magazine Interior
The magazines interior’s coating has to be thoroughly clean. Remove any smudges immediately! Clean the interior and film plates from dust carefully with a vacuum cleaner.
Notice
Do not use compressed air because you will risk blowing dust or film particles into inaccessible areas!
A rubber o-ring light trap is in the lid – inspect it regularly for mechanical damage and clean it with a dry cloth
– do not use solvents!
Magazine Exterior
Clean magazine painted surfaces and Plexiglas cover with a window cleaner (caution – do not moisten connector!). Keep connector, tightening wheels and footage counter clean and inspect them regularly for mechanical damage. Clean the light trap plate thoroughly before attaching it to the camera. Check the connector and remove possible dust out of the recesses by blowing carefully, e.g. with an aerosol spray (avoid blowing on the roller assembly), or better, with a vacuum cleaner.
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
76
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
MAGAZINE COVER
To open a magazine, lay it down carefully on its rear
(digital footage counter side). Push the small safety catch and hold it; then flip up the latch and turn it.
To open a Studio Magazine 120/400 or either of the
Lite Magazines, turn the latches counter-clockwise. To open the Studio Magazine 300/1000, turn the left latch counter-clockwise and the right one clockwise.
Studio Magazine 300/1000 Door Latches fig.2/6
➦
➡
Caution!
When closing the magazine, be sure that nothing gets caught between the door and the magazine’s body. Be careful that the safety catch engages properly in the latch, both parts must fit flush together when the magazine is closed.
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
77
COREHOLDER
By pressing the release knob on top of the coreholder, the three core locks move inwards. Now slide a plastic film core on the coreholder until it reaches the film plate and you hear a first ”click”. Hold the coreholder (without pressing the release knob) and – simultaneously – rotate the core gently to the left or right until you hear a second ”click”. Only now the core is properly seated.
If you do not hear the ”clicks”, the coreholder pin has engaged in the slit of the core already at the beginning.
If it is not properly seated – have another try.
Locked cores are released by pressing the release knob on the coreholder.
Caution!
In case of a malfunction of a coreholder, do not disassemble it – the magazine should be serviced at an ARRICAM Maintenance Centre only.
Coreholder fig.2/7
Core release knob
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
78
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
DIGITAL FOOTAGE COUNTER
All four ARRICAM Magazines are equipped with a digital footage counter. Being powered by its own onboard buffer battery, the memory of the counter will display the remaining footage, regardless if the magazine is mounted to a camera or not. When a magazine is attached to a powered camera, the magazine’s buffer battery recharges automatically.
In case nothing is displayed (which can happen if the magazine has been left unused for a long time), simply mount the magazine to a powered camera to reactivate the display. The magazine battery usually recharges automatically during the shooting period. There are also
Studio and Lite Magazine Charge Cables available to charge the counter batteries without the need for a camera body.
Studio Magazine Footage Counter fig.2/8
Lite Magazine Footage Counter fig.2/9
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
79
To set the RAW STOCK display, first use the preset selector switches to indicate the amount of filmstock loaded. Then push the button marked SET RAW
STOCK for 2 seconds until the footage counter stores the input figure.
When the camera is RUNNING, the footage counter counts down (e.g. from 0305 m to 0000 m). The display on the magazine will always show the remaining footage. If the camera is set to REVERSE the counter will count back up.
SETTING THE UNIT OF MEASUREMENT
Remaining film length is displayed in either feet or meters – a mark next to the counter figure indicates the option selected. In order to change the unit of measurement, depress the SET RAW STOCK and the
SHOW/SET ASA buttons simultaneously for about 3 seconds. This can be done either while the magazine is not mounted or when the magazine is mounted but the camera is not powered. The displayed unit (m or ft) will affect all film length displays on the camera. If the unit of measurement on a new magazine is different to the previous magazine, then the camera will display a warning that can be reset by pressing the PHASE button.
SETTING ASA FOR IN-CAMERA SLATE EXPOSURE
In order to achieve the best readability of the In-camera
Slate information, all ARRICAM Magazines allow the setting of the film speed to control the exposure of the markings. By pushing the button marked SHOW/SET
ASA next to the footage counter display with a toothpick, the cursor will move on the display, from m or ft to
ASA, and the set sensitivity will appear for about 3 sec.
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
80
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
By using the push wheel switches, the desired sensitivity can be preset and by pushing the SET ASA button for 2 seconds it will be fed into the system.
Notice
• When feeding the ASA rate of the film in the system, please consider if the film will be processed to its actual sensitivity or if it will be pushed. So e.g. if a 250 ASA film is to be pushed 1 stop, a rate of 500 ASA should be fed in.
• Because the displays of the Lite Magazines have only four digits, no cursor will appear when selecting the ASA rate.
Caution!
All four digits must always be used in feeding the rate, so for example
0320
.
TIGHTENING WHEELS (STUDIO MAGAZINES ONLY)
As long as power is supplied to the camera, the magazine’s incorporated electronically controlled motors will provide a permanent and appropriate film tension.
However, it is recommended you tighten the film manually in the magazine by turning the tightening wheels before connecting the camera to the power supply. This will take up any loose film that may have unwound prior to mounting the magazine on the camera.
A tightening wheel for each side is built into the cover of the two Studio Magazines. By depressing the tightening wheel, you may the core via friction plates in the direction of the arrow. The spring which brings the tightening wheel back to its resting position can be checked by depressing it slightly.
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
81
Studio Magazine Tightening Wheel fig.2/10
Caution!
Do not press the tightening wheels while the camera is RUNNING!
If a tightening wheel does not pop back into its resting position, the magazine has to be repaired at an ARRICAM Maintenance Centre.
Notice
The fed raw stock – wound emulsion in – winds off left hand spindle clockwise. The film winds onto the right hand spindle clockwise – the emulsion is always facing into the roll.
REMAINING FOOTAGE INDICATOR
As well as the digital footage counter, the Studio Magazine 300/1000 also has a remaining film length indicator. Only when the camera is not RUNNING, move the indicator gently towards the upper side of the magazine; the footage indicator lever will swing towards the film roll. The film length remaining in the magazine’s left half – usually the unexposed film – is shown on a scale located between the tightening wheels.
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
82
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Although the footage indicator lever is spring-loaded to return to a neutral position when released, it should be moved back manually. The footage indicator arm should lie flat on the magazine cover interior. Check spring and arm attachment by gently moving them.
Caution!
Due to the length of the footage indicator lever, care should be taken when checking it!
Studio Magazine remaining footage indicator fig.2/11
Studio Magazine footage lever fig.2/12
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
83
LOOP PROTECTOR
Magazines should always be protected by a clean Loop
Protector.
Two different Loop Protectors are provided, one for the
Studio Magazines, the other one for the Lite Magazines.
Studio Magazine Loop Protector fig.2/13 Lite Magazine Loop Protector
LABEL
Self-adhesive labels, supplied by the ARRICAM Maintenance Centres, can be slid into a holder on the outside of the magazines. Use these labels to identify film during shooting and stick them onto the film cans later.
Label fig.2/14
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
84
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
The ARRICAM Magazine Adapters
STUDIO MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
Preliminary remarks
There are two ARRICAM Studio magazines:
• the Studio Magazine 300/1000
• the Studio Magazine 120/400
The only other magazines that can be mounted on the
ARRICAM Studio are the ARRICAM Lite magazine by means of a special adapter.
The use of an adapter is always necessary for mounting a magazine on the ARRICAM Studio.
There are four possibilities for mounting magazines on the ARRICAM Studio:
1. Studio magazine horizontally at the top with the
Top Load Adapter or the Dual Port Adapter e.g. for operation with geared or fluid head
2. Studio magazine inclined at the rear with the Dual
Port Adapter e.g. for shoulder operation or with a geared or fluid head
3. Studio magazine vertically at the rear with the Back
Load Adapter e.g. for handheld or Steadicam operation
4. Lite magazine only at the rear with the Lite Mag to
Studio Camera Adapter
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
85
Studio –Top & Back Load Adapters fig.2/15
Studio – Dual Port Adapter fig.2/16
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
86
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Studio – Magazine Overview fig.2/17
ARRICAM Studio
Top Load Adapter
Dual Port Adapter
Studio Magazine 300/1000
Studio Magazine 120/400
Back Load Adapter
Lite Shoulder Magazine
Lite Mag to
Studio Camera Adapter
Studio – Lite Mag to Studio Camera Adapter fig.2/18
Lite Steadicam Magazine
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
87
The four adapters are equipped with similar safety locks and connectors for the mounting and electronic linking of the magazines to the camera body
Notice
• If one of the Lite Viewfinders or the Lite 100%
Video Top together with its Lite Video Assist is mounted on the ARRICAM Studio, top mounting of magazine is not possible.
• When using the Dual Port Adapter the Lite Video
Assist cannot be installed.
MOUNTING/REMOVING THE ADAPTERS
The four adapters are fastened on the camera body by six 3 mm hex screws: two on top, two on the top-rear edge and two at the lower rear of the camera body opening. Pins on the adapter fit into holes on the camera body and ensure a perfect fit of the adapters on the camera.
After checking that all contact surfaces are absolutely clean, offer the adapter forward towards the camera until the register pins engage.
Caution!
Depress gently on the adapter and first tighten
both 3 mm hex screws on the top-rear edge (middle) of the adapter.
Then tighten the four remaining screws. When removing the adapter, also unscrew the middle screws first – see fig. 1/8 on page 27.
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
88
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Studio –Magazine Adapter mounting fig.2/19
Studio – Dual Port Adapter mounting fig.2/20
Mounting screws
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
89
MOUNTING STUDIO MAGAZINES ON ADAPTERS
Position the back part of the magazine’s roller assembly on the rear/lower dovetail of the magazine adapter. Pull the film loop with your left hand through the adapter opening into the camera. Push the magazine carefully into the adapter until it engages in the magazine latch.
Caution!
When attaching the magazine, be careful that the film does not get caught between the magazine and the dovetail on the adapter opening!
Because the lock mechanism is very quiet, make sure that the magazine is mounted firmly before releasing it. To double check that the magazine is properly seated and locked, briefly pull the magazine away from the camera.
Caution!
To prevent the powered camera automatically pulling the film into the magazine when mounting it, either switch the power OFF or open one of the film guides first – see chapter 3, fig. 3/7.
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
90
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
REMOVING STUDIO MAGAZINES FROM ADAPTERS
Before removing a magazine, be sure that no film is threaded in the movement. To remove the magazine, hold the safety button depressed when moving the release lever clockwise while holding the magazine firmly!
Studio – Top Load Adapter, release button fig.2/21
Studio – Back Load Adapter, release button fig.2/22
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
91
CAMERA COVER CAP
If no magazine is mounted on the camera, you should always fit a Camera Cover Cap to the adapter. The engraving ‘ARRICAM’ should cover the electrical contacts.
Studio – Back Load Adapter, Camera Cover Cap fig.2/23
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
92
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Notice
• While shooting with the Dual Port Adapter, its
Cover Cap, complete with handgrip, obviously must be installed to avoid light entering the camera. In order to be safe, the warning
Covr
will appear on the FPS displays to remind you to cover the cavity.
• The Dual Port Adapter Cover Cap with detachable handgrip is not compatible with the one of the other magazine adapters.
Studio – Dual Port Adapter, Cover Cap and Handgrip fig.2/24
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
93
ADAPTERS’ CARRYING HANDLES
Each Studio Magazine Adapter is equipped with a handle.
Notice
When using a Lite Viewfinder or the Lite 100% Video
Top on the ARRICAM Studio, you must first remove the handgrip from the Back Load Adapter before you can install the Lite Video Assist.
To do so, unscrew the four 3 mm hex screws by using a
3 mm metric hex wrench and remove the Carrying Handle. (The two rear screws are concealed in the uprights of the rear handle riser). Now unscrew the two 3 mm screws out of the bottom part of the previously removed
Carrying Handle and fix them in the two threaded sockets on the adapter’s front. Do not forget to replace these screws when remounting the Carrying Handle!
To carry the camera in this configuration, replace the removed Handle with the Studio Centre Carrying
Handle.
Caution!
On the Dual Port Adapter, the handgrip is part of the removable Cover Cap. Therefore you must be sure that the cover is mounted firmly to the adapter before carrying the camera.
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
94
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Studio – Back Load Adapter, Handgrip mounting fig.2/25
Mounting screws
Studio – Back Load Adapter, Handgrip mounting fig.2/26
Concealed screws
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
95
MOUNTING LITE MAGAZINES ON THE ARRICAM LITE
Before being able to install a magazine, the ARRICAM
Lite Camera Cover Cap must be removed. Press the Lite
Magazine release button and slide the cover out of the camera body. Now carefully slide the Lite Magazine onto the rails until you hear a gentle click. When closing the camera door, the magazine will automatically be held in the correct position.
Lite – Magazine attachment fig.2/27
Threaded holes for Lite
Magazine Adapter
Lite Magazine release button
Camera cover cap
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
96
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
THE STUDIO MAG TO LITE CAMERA ADAPTER
In order to mount the Studio Magazines on the Lite, there is an adapter for the LIte that replicates the receptacle of the ARRICAM Studio Magazine Adapters. The adapter door located at the left side of the Studio Mag to Lite Camera Adapter can be swung towards you to facilitate the threading of the film.
Lite – Studio Mag to Lite Camera Adapter fig.2/28
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
97
MOUNTING THE STUDIO MAG TO LITE CAMERA
ADAPTER ON THE ARRICAM LITE
Instead of a Lite Magazine, the Studio Mag to Lite
Camera Adapter can be mounted on the ARRICAM Lite.
As soon as the adapter sits tightly in place, secure it by tightening the three hex screws with a 3 mm metric hex wrench.
Lite – Studio Mag to Lite Camera Adapter fig.2/29
➡ ➡
MOUNTING AND REMOVING STUDIO MAGAZINES
ON/FROM THE LITE
Because the Studio Mag to Lite Camera Adapter has the same mechanism as the one of the Studio Magazine
Adapters, please see previous instructions for that section.
Caution!
Before closing the camera door, be sure that the adapter door is closed first.
2 – THE MAGAZINES AND MAGAZINE ADAPTERS
98
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
LOADING THE MAGAZINES, THREADING THE CAMERAS
Loading The Magazines
Preliminary remark
The Lite Shoulder and Steadicam Magazine are loaded in the same way as the Studio Magazines.
The main differences between the Studio and Lite
Magazines are:
• the magazines’ throats (roller assemblies)
• that before loading an active displacement type
Lite Magazine, you have to move the coreholders to the right in order to be able to feed a120m/
400ft roll of film.
1. Clean darkroom/changing tent.
2. Remove the loop protector.
3. Lift the magazine’s cover. Check and clean magazine.
4. Lay the magazine down carefully in the darkroom or changing tent onto footage counter side; roller assembly is facing you.
5. Insert core on the take up side.
Lite Magazine fig.3/1
Feed side
➡
Take up side
3 – LOADING THE MAGAZINES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
101
From now on in total darkness!
6. Put film roll on the empty can and place it to the magazine’s left side.
7. Wind off just enough film to insert it into the roller assembly to the left of the main roller. Push the film gently into the slot until it emerges from the other side.
Studio Magazine fig.3/2
Opposite view
Take up side
Feed side
8. Pull approx. 30cm/1ft film towards you.
Unlock the left coreholder by depressing the core release knob.
Place film roll onto the coreholder – caution: do not press, film might be scratched! – the roll should slide towards magazine bottom smoothly until you hear a first ”click”.
Hold the plate or the coreholder – but without pushing the core release knob and – simultaneously – turn the roll gently clockwise until you hear a second ”click”. Only now the roll is properly seated. If you don’t hear a second ”click”, lift the roll from the coreholder and repeat the operation.
3 – LOADING THE MAGAZINES
102
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
9. From outside insert film into the roller assembly between central and right roller.
Studio Magazine fig.3/3
Studio Magazine fig.3/4
Take up side
Opposite view
Feed side
10. Attach to take up core. Feed film into core slot so that no acute angle forms when turning the core clockwise. Wind just enough film around take up core to make sure it will not accidentally slide out again. Wound up film has to be flush with the core and lie flat on take up plate or coreholder disk.
3 – LOADING THE MAGAZINES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
103
Tighten the two rolls by holding the left one and turning the right one clockwise.
Core – film inserting fig.3/5
Correct Incorrect way
Do not tighten the film too much because it will be scratched!
The film windings on the feed side must not protrude below the plate; film might touch the magazine bottom.
11. Close and latch magazine after checking that film is properly seated and nothing is caught between magazine bottom and cover! Before turning light on or open the changing bag, check that the door is closed properly.
Caution!
When closing the magazine, care should be taken that nothing (e.g. changing tent, film bag, etc.) is caught between magazine cover and magazine base.
Especially with the Studio Magazine 300/1000, closing the lid too forcibly might lead to light leakage! Furthermore, the rubber light seal might
3 – LOADING THE MAGAZINES
104
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
become damaged!
Gently pull at the door to make sure that the magazine is safely closed.
From now on in the light
12. Attach a loop protector.
13. Input length and ASA rate of unexposed film into footage counter – see page 79, fig 2/8 and 2/9 and insert a label into the dedicated holder.
3 – LOADING THE MAGAZINES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
105
Mounting A Magazine And
Threading The Cameras
Preliminary remark
Despite small differences – the release mechanism of the film guides and the buckle switch – both cameras are threaded in the same way.
Caution!
• Because no tightening wheels are provided on the Lite Magazines, it is imperative to control the adequate winding before shooting. To do so, check the film to ensure the magazine motors provide the correct tension. When RUN-
NING UP and then DOWN, no free film loop should remain in the chamber.
• If a short end remains in an Lite Magazine that has to be removed from the camera, it is recommended to separate the rolls because it will not be possible to tension the film manually before re-mounting the Lite Magazine on the camera again (reloading). By pushing a film loop in the magazine manually, a risk of jam is given.
1. Open the camera door and remove the Camera
Cover Cap.
On the ARRICAM Studio
Remove the cover from the Magazine Adapter.
While pushing the silver magazine release safety button, push down the release lever to remove either the cover or a magazine.
3 – THREADING THE CAMERAS
106
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Notice
• Be sure to put the cover in a safe place in order to
find it easily when you will remove the magazine.
• When using the Dual Port Adapter, place and
secure firmly the special cover on the opening you will not use to mount the magazine.
On the ARRICAM Lite
Open the camera door.
Push the silver release button down to slide out the
Camera Cover Cap.
Lite Magazine fig.3/6
Release button
➡ ➡
3 – THREADING THE CAMERAS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
107
On both cameras
2. Swing away the rear film guides by pushing the upper and lower release buttons.
Lite Studio – threading fig.3/7
Release button
Release button
3. Slide the movement to its rear position by rotating the lever clockwise.
Studio – threading fig.3/8 Lite
4. Pull some film out of the magazine until the loop is about one hand width long.
Caution!
For the following steps, make sure
• that the film will not get caught between the
magazine and the adapter!
• that the magazine is firmly attached to the
magazine adapter
3 – THREADING THE CAMERAS
108
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
On the ARRICAM with a Studio Magazine Adapter:
5. Carefully place the magazine onto the adapter. Pull some more film out of the magazine feed side and lay the film into the proper path. Swing magazine towards camera body until it engages in the latch.
Double check that the magazine is secured firmly.
Studio – threading fig.3/9
Studio – threading fig.3/10
3 – THREADING THE CAMERAS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
109
On the ARRICAM Lite:
5. From the side, push the magazine halfway into the dovetail guide on the camera.
Place the film in the movement so that it lies between the sprocket guides and the sprocket rollers, and between the movement and the film gate.
Now push the magazine fully into the camera.
On the ARRICAM Lite with Studio Mag to Lite Camera
Adapter:
5. Open the adapter door.
Place the magazine carefully onto the Studio Mag to Lite Camera Adapter.
Pull some more film out of the magazine feed side and lay the film into the proper path.
Lite – threading Studio Magazine fig.3/11
3 – THREADING THE CAMERAS
110
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Lite – threading Studio Magazine fig.3/12
On both cameras
6. Position the film on the lower sprockets so that the teeth engage the film perforations. Close the lower film guide by pushing it towards the sprocket.
Repeat for the upper sprocket.
Notice
The sprocket teeth must engage properly in film perforations! If you cannot close a film guide easily, the teeth probably are not engaged in the film perforations properly. Open the film guide and reposition the film. Never force a film guide!
7. Rotate the INCHING knob so the index point is at
12 o’clock.
Thread film between Aperture Plates and movement block in a generous loop.
3 – THREADING THE CAMERAS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
111
8. Turn the movement locking lever with one hand gently counter-clockwise to move the movement block into its front position. At the same time, twist the
INCHING knob with the other hand to the left and right (as in the drawing below) to engage the pulldown claws gently and properly in the film perforations. Only then lock the movement block by further turning the lever counter-clockwise until it engages in its front position with a slight click.
Studio – twisting fig.3/13 Lite
9. To adjust loop length, turn INCHING knob to the position (dot) labelled ”LOOP”.
Studio – Loop adjustment fig.3/14 Lite
10. Form upper film loop by depressing and turning the sprocket roller. It should follow the ”LOOP” mark engraved on the rear of the camera interior.
3 – THREADING THE CAMERAS
112
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
11. Repeat this procedure with the lower film loop.
On the ARRICAM Studio only
12. Move the buckle switch to its centre position and check film transport by turning the INCHING knob clockwise. Now film should be tensioned by the winders. If not, check that the locking levers and the buckle switches are in the shooting position.
Then push the PHASE button. The camera will start to INCH over at 1 fps which allows you to check the correct threading.
Notice
While the PHASE button is pushed, the actual voltage of the power supply will show up in the
FPS displays.
Studio – buckle switch fig.3/15
Buckle trip
Caution!
As soon as you switch the camera power ON, the magazine motors are activated to tighten the film. To prevent this when mounting a magazine or loading film, just open a film guide by pushing a sprocket guide release button or set the camera
MAIN switch to OFF.
3 – THREADING THE CAMERAS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
113
RUN the camera briefly at 24 or 25 fps to check for proper threading. With a little practice you will be able to hear if there is any problem by the sound of film
RUNNING through the camera at 24 or 25 fps.
To improve the noise level with the film stock you will use, turn the PITCH Adjustment screw with a 3 mm metric hex wrench while the camera is RUNNING at 24 or
25 fps until you find the quietest position.
When the camera is set to RUN REVERSE, the best image steadiness can be achieved by setting the FWD/
REV Adjustment screw to REV.
When closing the camera door, care should be taken that the camera interior is clean and the door lock is flush with the door.
Studio – Top Load Adapter fig.3/16
3 – THREADING THE CAMERAS
114
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Studio – Back Load Adapter fig.3/17
Studio – Dual Port Adapter (rear) fig.3/18
(Will also top mount: see fi g 3/16)
Studio – Lite Mag to Studio Camera Adapter fig.3/19
3 – THREADING THE CAMERAS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
115
Lite – Shoulder Mag fig.3/20
Lite – Steadicam Mag fig.3/21
Lite – Studio Mag to Lite Camera Adapter fig.3/22
3 – THREADING THE CAMERAS
116
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
THE ARRICAM OPTICAL VIEWFINDERS
OPEN LOCK
LOCK OPEN UNLOCK
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
119
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
120
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
121
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
122
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
LOCK OPEN UNLOCK
The Optical Viewfinder System
Components
INTRODUCTION
ARRI offers a versatile modular ARRICAM Viewfinder
System. All Viewfinders are usable without the need of adapters on both cameras, the ARRICAM Studio and the ARRICAM Lite.
THE ARRICAM VIEWFINDERS
The user may choose between four Optical Viewfinders:
The Studio Viewfinders for spherical and anamorphic cinematography.
It offers an exceptional viewing quality favoured by a large optical design. Special care has been taken to avoid the unpleasant vignette effect that could occur by moving the eye. Two types of Studio Viewfinder are available. The attachment of the Arms to the Viewfinder
Block makes the difference between the two types.
1. The “Hinge type” has a permanently hinge mounting of the Viewfinder Arm that can be swivelled to both sides of the camera. Even though a Long Zoom
Anamorphic Extension Tube with a swing-away desqueezer is attachable on this Viewfinder, it is mainly foreseen for spherical cinematography.
2. The “Bayonet type” has an exchangeable Viewfinder Arm. A mini PL bayonet port allows not only the exchange of the Viewfinder Arm but also its swivelling to both sides of the camera. Two different Arms are provided, the regular Studio Viewfinder Arm for
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
125
spherical cinematography and the Universal Studio
Viewfinder Arm with an integrated swing-in de-squeezer.
The Lite Viewfinders for spherical and anamorphic cinematography.
Even though the Lite Viewfinders are smaller and lighter than the Studio Viewfinders, they offer versatile possibilities and an excellent viewing quality. Two types of Lite
Viewfinders are available.
3. The Lite Viewfinder for spherical cinematography only. It has been specially conceived for handheld operation.
Lite Viewfinder
fig.4/2
Video assist mounting screws
Swivel friction adjustment
Lite Video Assist
Swivelling viewfinder arm
Filter lever
Eyepiece rotation lock
Lite Mask
Frameglow
Module
Eyecup
Image rotation knob
Lite eyepiece
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
126
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
4. The Lite Universal Viewfinder for spherical and anamorphic cinematography. This viewfinder contains a swing-in anamorphic de-squeezer lens.
All four Viewfinders permit the use of an Eyepiece and a Video Assist at the same time. A beam splitter with a ratio of 80% for the Eyepiece and 20% for the Video
Assist allows a very bright viewfinder image.
Studio Viewfinder
fig.4/3
Mini monitor
connector
Swivelling viewfinder arm
Arm hinge
MINI-
MONIT
IN
Studio video assist
Viewfinder mounting screws
Studio Readout port cover
Studio LCD Frameglow
Filter lever
Hinge release knob
Viefinder extension lock
Eyepiece rotation friction
Image rotation knob
Studio Medium
Extension
Eyecup
Studio eyepiece
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
127
Bottom View
Lite Viewfinder
fig.4/4
Viewfinder arm
Mounting screw
Fixing pin
Viewfinder block
Lite Universal Viewfinder
fig.4/5
Viewfinder
arm
Image rotation knob
Viewfinder connector
Mounting screws
Viewfinder window
Image rotation knob
Mounting screw
Fixing pin
Viewfinder block
Studio Viewfinder (bayonet)
fig.4/6
Viewfinder
arm
Swivel friction adjustment
Mini PL bayonet port
Mounting screws
Viewfinder connector
Mounting screws
Viewfinder window
Image rotation
Bayonet flange
Viewfinder connector
Filter lever
Mounting screw
Fixing pins
Viewfinder window
Viewfinder block knob
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
128
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Top View
Lite Viewfinder
fig.4/7
Filter lever Video assist connector
Swivel friction adjustment
Video assist mounting holes
Image rotation knob
Eyepiece rotation friction
Video assist window
Mounting screws
Lite Universal Viewfinder
fig.4/8
Viefinder extension lock
Swivel friction adjustment
Swing-in de-squeezer
Video assist connector
Image levelling knob
Eyepiece rotation friction
Swivel unlock lever
Video assist window
Mounting screws
Swivel friction adjustment
Studio Universal Viewfinder
fig.4/9
Image levelling knob
Viefinder extension lock
Swing-in de-squeezer
DURING RELEASE
CAUTION: HOLD TUBE
UNLOCK OPEN
Swivel unlock lever
LOCK
Filter lever
LOCK OPEN
Studio Readout cover
Mounting screws
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
129
THE ARRICAM 100% VIDEO TOPS
As well as the four Optical Viewfinders, ARRICAM also offers the option of framing pictures by means of a
Video Viewfinder. This gives the operator the choice between the possibility of using the optical image as well as the video image or only to use the video image alone. The latter option would be chosen when looking through the Viewfinder is not possible or not desirable
– e.g. Steadicam or remote head operation. To work with the ”flexibility of a mini-DV camera”, the operator can use one of the On Board Monitors instead of looking through an Eyepiece.
When no Optical Viewfinder is needed, the Video
Assists can be mounted directly to the ARRICAM Studio or to the ARRICAM Lite by means of the lightweight
100% Video Tops.
Depending on the type of Video Assist used, either the
Studio 100% Video Top or the Lite 100% Video Top will be used. Both Video Tops can be mounted on either camera body.
On the base of all Viewfinders and of the two 100%
Video Tops, the Viewfinder’s window, the connector, the fixing pins and retaining screws are protected by a cover. Unscrew the hex screws with an 3 mm metric hex wrench to remove the cover and mount the Viewfinder or the 100% Video Top to the camera.
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
130
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Studio 100% Video Top
fig.4/10
Video top connector
Video top window
Bottom view
Lite 100% Video Top
Video top connector
Video top window
Fixing pins
Mounting screws
Fixing pins
Studio 100% Video Top
fig.4/11
Studio video assist mounting holes
Lite 100% Video Top
fig.4/12
Lite video assist mounting holes
Video assist window
Video assist connector
Right side Top view
Video assist window
Video assist connector
THE ARRICAM VIDEO ASSISTS
ARRI offers two technically similar Video Assists – for description see chapter 5 – to be installed on the appropriate Optical Viewfinder or 100% Video Top.
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
131
MOUNTING THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDERS OR
THE 100 % VIDEO TOPS
Notice
Because all the components are quite similar, the following description is valid for all four Viewfinders and both 100% Video Tops. Differences between the components are described separately.
After removing the protection cover (fixed with two 3 mm hex screws) and checking that both parts (connectors, glass surfaces) are absolutely free of dust and fingerprints, mount the Viewfinder or 100% Video Top on the camera. The pins must engage easily in the gauged holes. While tightening the three 3 mm hex screws, the connectors will fit together automatically. Therefore be sure that the Viewfinder or 100% Video Top sits securely on the camera.
Because ARRICAM offers the possibility to shoot in
STANDARD 35 or in SUPER 35, the Viewfinder must be mounted to fit these formats.
Viewfinder mounting plate
fig.4/13
Viewfinder attachment
(threaded holes)
Format label
Viewfinder attachment
(gauged holes)
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
132
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Studio Viewfinder
fig.4/14
Threaded holes
Lite Viewfinder
fig.4/15
Threaded holes
Studio 100% Video
fig.4/16
Mounting screws
Opposite view
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
133
Notice
The change between formats should be carried out in the rental house. In addition to the lens port, the desired Viewfinder Mounting Plate will also be installed. In ARRICAM Maintenance Centre, skilled technicians are not only trained to adapt the
ARRICAM to the production needs, but also have all the control instruments to check e.g. the flange focal distance. Nevertheless, if you would like to change the format yourself, please see the instruction in chapter 11 – Miscellaneous. The engraving on the
Mounting Plate top shows the format.
THE VIEWFINDER’S HOUSING
The four Viewfinder’s housing have similar characteristics.
On the left side of all Viewfinders a Frameglow module attachment is covered by a removable cover plate.
Unscrew the hex screws with an 3 mm metric hex wrench to remove the cover plate and to mount the
Frameglow module – see fig. 4/43.
Studio Frameglow attachment
fig.4/17
Left side Frameglow attachment
Frameglow window
Eyepiece bayonet
Left side
Eyepiece bayonet
Frameglow connector
Frameglow attachment
Frameglow window
Frameglow connector
Lite Frameglow attachment
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
134
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
On the right side of the Studio Viewfinders and on the top of all Lite Viewfinders, a Video Assist attachment is covered by a removable cover plate. Unscrew the two hex screws with an 3 mm metric hex wrench to remove the cover plate to mount the corresponding Video Assist
– see chapter 5 – Video Assist.
Studio Video Assist attachment
fig.4/18
Video assist attachment holes
Right side
Video assist connector
Video assist window
VIEWING FILTER LEVER
On the front of all Viewfinders, a viewing filter lever is located next to the Viewfinder Arm attachment.
When depressing the filter lever, an ND 0.6 filter will be swung into the Viewfinder optical beam path.
Lite Viewfinder Filter lever
fig.4/19
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
135
Studio Viewfinder arm (bayonet)
fig.4/20
Viewfinder block
Filter lever
Mini PL bayonet lever
Viewfinder extension lock
Image rotation knob
Front
Eyepiece rotation friction
Image rotation lock
Studio Universal Viewfinder arm
fig.4/21
Swivel friction adjustment
Arm stop
Eyepiece unlock
Eyepiece bayonet safety button
LOCK OPEN UNLOCK
CAUTION: HOLD TUBE
Top
Swing-in de-squeezer
Image rotation locking button
Image rotation knob
Studio Viewfinder arm (hinge type)
fig.4/22
Viewfinder extension lock
Viewfinder extension lock
Image rotation knob
Front
Arm hinge
Eyepiece rotation lock
Image rotation lock
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
136
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
THE VIEWFINDER ARMS
The Viewfinder Arms can easily be swivelled to both sides of the camera. On the Lite Viewfinders as well as the hinge type Studio Viewfinder, the swivelling arms are mounted on the Viewfinder but they are only removable, e.g. for servicing in ARRICAM Maintenance Centres. On the bayonet type Studio Viewfinders, the Arm mount itself is rotatable. If necessary, e.g. for placing the Eyepiece on the camera right side while a Studio
Magazine 300/1000 is mounted on top of the Studio, remove the Arm from the Viewfinder housing and remount it in the desired position.
SWIVELLING THE VIEWFINDER ARM
Only with the hinge type Studio Viewfinder and only when a Studio Magazine 300/1000 is mounted on top of the camera, the orientable Viewfinder Arm must be tilted forward in order to be able to swing the Arm over to the other side of the camera. To do so, loosen the Eyepiece rotation friction knob first. Then turn the
Eyepiece upwards in its vertical position. Now press the hinge release knob and swing the Arm carefully forward. After pivoting the Arm to the other side of the camera, close the Viewfinder again. It locks automatically when a fixing pin entered one of the gauged holes.
Two optional Brackets, that can be attached with a
3 mm hex screw on the Viewfinder Block, enable the
Viewfinder Arms to rest on the camera right side. The Lite
Universal Viewfinder Bracket is dedicated to the Lite Universal Viewfinder. The Studio Viewfinder Bracket is dedicated to the Studio and Studio Universal Viewfinders.
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
137
Notice
If using either of the Lite Viewfinders on a Studio and you want to swing the arm over to the right side when a Studio Magazine 300/1000 is mounted on top, you must remove the magazine first in order to swivel the Viewfinder Arm to the right side of the camera.
ADJUSTMENT OF THE SWIVEL FRICTION
Preliminary remark:
Because this operation is quite sensitive, Maintenance personnel will carry out the adjustment before the equipment leaves the rental house.The friction of the swivel mechanism can be adjusted by means of a 2 mm metric hex wrench and a special ARRI tool (A 16SR 3) with the part number
K5.26129.0 – it is a twin-pronged driver. To increase or decrease the tension, first loosen the locking sleeve by turning it counter-clockwise one turn. Once it has been loosened, turn the 2 mm metric hex wrench clockwise to increase – or counter-clockwise to decrease the tension.
After that, do not forget to lock again the locking sleeve by turning clockwise the twin-pronged driver! Do not turn it more than one turn – its sufficient for a safe operation!
Swivel Friction Adjustment
fig.4/23 swivel friction screw twinpronged driver
A 16SR 3
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
138
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Lite Universal Viewfinder Arm Bracket
fig.4/24
Arm bracket
Caution!
1. No dirt must get into the open Viewfinder
System!
2. With well maintained cameras, pivoting is easily possible without having to apply force.
Studio Viewfinder (hinge type)
fig.4/25
Release knob
Studio Viewfinder (bayonet)
fig.4/26
Studio Viewfinder (bayonet)
fig.4/27
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
139
ERGONOMY
On all Studio and the Lite Universal Viewfinders, an extending feature allows the Eyepiece to move in and out from the camera body to facilitate left or right eye viewing. The Arms can be telescoped up to approximately 40 mm. Shifting does not change size, sharpness or quality of the viewfinder image. To extend or reduce the Viewfinder Arm length, turn the knurled ring towards the position labelled loose, then pull or push the Arm elbow to the desired length and retighten the knurled ring.
Studio Viewfinder extension arm
fig.4/28 fix loose
➡ ➡
The other end of the Viewfinder Arm provides a mini
PL bayonet mount to attach the Eyepiece. In order to adjust the Eyepiece position for a comfortable viewing, loose the eyepiece rotation friction knob located on the bottom side of the Viewfinder Arm.
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
140
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
FRICTION ADJUSTMENT OF THE PIVOTING EYEPIECE
The Eyepiece mounted to the Viewfinder’s Arm rotates vertically through 360°. To turn an Eyepiece, loosen the eyepiece rotation friction knob below the Eyepiece mount, turn the Eyepiece and tighten the knob again.
To loosen tension, turn counter-clockwise. To tighten tension, turn clockwise. Although this rotation friction adjustment can hold the weight of an Eyepiece Extension, we recommend to use the Levelling Rod – see fig.4/39.
Caution!
The tension has to be loosen when using the
Levelling Rod!
Eyepiece rotation friction adjustment
fig.4/29 loose fix
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
141
LEVELLING OF THE VIEWFINDER IMAGE
While rotating and/or swivelling the Viewfinder Arm, all Viewfinders automatically give an upright erect and correct left-to-right image, regardless of the angle of view. When mounting or removing an Extension Tube between Viewfinder Arm and Eyepiece, however, the image orientation has to be adjusted manually by turning the prism assembly 180°. In case a different image orientation is desired, you can turn it as you like.
Except on the Studio Universal Viewfinder Arm, all other
Viewfinder Arms have knurled image levelling adjustment knobs located at the bottom as well as on top.
Loosen the knob at the bottom while holding the one on top; then turn the upper knob until you get the desired image. To fix the new position, tighten the knob at the bottom again while holding the one on top.
Image levelling adjustment
fig.4/30 image rotation knob loose fix
Image
rotation lock
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
142
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
When using the Studio Universal Viewfinder Arm, hold the locking button pressed down and turn the image rotation knob until the image is levelled as you wish.
To re-activate the automatic image levelling, turn the image levelling knob until it locks in one of the four locking positions. If the image is inverted, depress again the locking button and turn the levelling knob, while releasing the locking button, until it stops in the opposite locking position.
Studio Universal Viewfinder – image rotation
fig.4/31
CAUTION: HOLD TUBE
THE SWING-IN DE-SQUEEZER
The Studio and Lite Universal Viewfinders enable the switching between a regular and a de-squeezed viewfinder image. The de-squeezed viewfinder image will always stay levelled when the Viewfinder Arm rests in the “normal” horizontal position, regardless if the Eyepiece is on the left or on the right side of the camera or even when the Eyepiece is rotated. Only when the
Viewfinder Arm is swivelled, the de-squeezed viewfinder image is not usable in the “in-between” position. Therefore, if the Eyepiece must be placed e.g. on the top rear of the camera, the use of the Studio Anamorphic
Extension Tube is recommended.
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
143
THE EYEPIECES
Three Eyepieces are provided for the ARRICAM Viewfinders. A large Studio Eyepiece can be mounted on all
Viewfinder Arms except on the Lite Viewfinder. Specially conceived for handheld operations, the Lite Universal
Eyepiece can be mounted on the Lite Universal Viewfinder, but also can be used with the Studio Viewfinders.
The Lite Viewfinder has its own smaller and lightweight optimised Eyepiece. The three Eyepieces may be focused by turning the knurled barrel. With the help of a scale labelled from 1 to 12, the assistant can easily adjust the lens to the eyesight of different operators.
Corrections may be made in a range from approx. -5.5 to +5.5 dioptres; exception: when the Lite Universal
Eyepiece is mounted on a Studio Viewfinder only -2 to
+5.5 dioptres adjustment is possible.
Eyepieces
fig.4/32
Studio Lite Universal Lite
Eyepiece flange
Eyepiece focus
Eyecup mount
Caution!
Because of the different mounts, the Lite Eyepiece is not interchangeable with the other Eyepieces.
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
144
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
MOUNTING THE EYEPIECE
By means of bayonet mounts, the Eyepieces and
Extension Tubes can be mounted and removed effortlessly from the Viewfinder Arms. To mount the Eyepiece, remove the protection cap by rotating the bayonet counter-clockwise. After checking that both parts are immaculately clean, gently insert the Eyepiece or
Extension tube into the port and lock it by rotating the retaining bayonet clockwise until it is correctly seated.
In order to prevent the Eyepiece or Extension Tube from falling out when it is not held firmly during its removal, an additional UNLOCK safety button has been incorporated into most Eyepiece bayonets. So, after rotating the bayonet lever, push the little button to release the
Eyepiece or Extension Tube.
Eyepiece mini PL bayonet mount
fig.4/33
➡
Unlock safety button
Locking lever
Locking lever
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
145
Eyepiece mounting
fig.4/34
THE EYECUPS
ARRI provides two rubber cushionable Eyecups that can be mounted on all ARRICAM Eyepieces.
The rubber Eyecup is mounted on a holder which integrates a shutter mechanism. By moving the lever the
Viewfinder can be opened or closed.
Eyecup
fig.4/35
The difference between both Eyecups is that one is equipped with a heater that prevents the entry pupil from fogging in low temperatures, e.g. when filming outdoors in winter.
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
146
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Heated Eyecup
fig.4/36
To mount the Heated Eyecup, pull the Regular Eyecup off the Eyepiece retaining ring and replace it with the
Heated one by pushing it into the Eyecup attachment of the Eyepiece. In order to activate the heater, switch
OFF the camera, plug one end of the short coiled cable into the Eyecup connector, the other end into one of the power outlets on the camera – see fig. 1/4 and 4/37.
On the ARRICAM Studio, two connectors are located on the camera left side on top of the Camera Control
Panel; on the ARRICAM Lite, the connectors are located on top of the camera front, left and right of the lens port.
Set the heating level with the toggle switch to LO for lower heat output or to HI for higher heat output.
Heated Eyecup Cable – KC 63-SP-S
fig.4/37
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
147
Caution!
If the camera is powered by battery, it is recommended to switch OFF the Eyecup heating during extended breaks in filming.
To clean the entry pupil, remove the Eyecup by simply pulling it straight out.
Eye friendly covers, such as chamois or cotton cloth, can be easily attached with a rubber band. Another useful cover are the terry cloth “wrist bands“, well-known from tennis, as they are sweat absorbing, reusable and easy to attach.
THE EYEPIECE EXTENSIONS
ARRICAM supplies four different bayonet-mount extension tubes – three for the Studio and Lite Universal Viewfinders, and a lightweight one for the Lite Viewfinder
– which can be mounted between the Viewfinders and the Eyepieces. The extension tubes, fitted with a receptacle for the ARRICAM Eyepiece Levelling Rod, are:
1. The Studio Medium Extension that brings the entry pupil of the Eyepiece about 15 cm/5.9” behind the film plane.
2. The Studio Zoom Extension with variable image magnifier (2x) brings the entry pupil of the Eyepiece about 30 cm/11.8” behind the film plane.
3. The Studio Anamorphic Extention with variable image magnifier and flip-in de-squeezer lens brings the entry pupil of the Eyepiece about 30 cm/11.8” behind the film plane.
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
148
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Notice
Both the Zoom and Anamorphic Extensions have built-in magnifiers that allow even more critical eyefocusing. Turn the zoom ring to magnify the image of the Ground Glass in a continuous range. A mark on the ring indicates the standard image size.
4. The Lite Extension brings the entry pupil of the
Eyepiece about 25 cm/9.8” behind the film plane.
It has a built-in image magnifier that allows even more critical eye-focusing. Turning the knob switches the image of the Ground Glass from normal size to
2x magnification.
Eyepiece Extensions
fig.4/38
Studio Medium Extension
Levelling rod attachment
Studio Zoom Extension
Studio Anamorphic Extension Zoom ring
Lite Extension
Anamorphic/ spherical lever
Magnifier knob
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
149
Notice
It is recommended to use the zoom or magnifier only when checking and not when shooting because only the centre part of the image appears in the Eyepiece.
VIEWFINDER LEVELLING ROD
A Viewfinder Support Levelling Rod may be attached to the Viewfinder Extensions. This rod is attached by sliding the sprung loaded dovetail into the holder. To remove it press the spring. The support is clamped to the head and its lenghts is adjustable.
Levelling rod
fig.4/39
Levelling rod attachment
fig.4/40
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
150
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Caution!
The Eyepiece rotation friction adjustment has to be loosen when using the Levelling Rod!
FURTHER VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
ARRI also offers several Ground Glasses as well as three
Frameglow Modules and a Readout Unit.
THE ARRICAM FIELDLENS AND GROUND GLASS
The Fieldlens is located on top of the interchangeable
Ground Glass.
All Ground Glasses of the ARRICAM Cameras are mechanically identical and may be used with the
ARRICAM Studio as well as with the ARRICAM Lite.
Ground Glass & Fieldlens
fig.4/41
Threaded hole (2.5 or 3 mm)
Threaded hole
(3 mm )
Fieldlens Ground Glass
Caution!
• The Fieldlens should only be removed by
ARRICAM Maintenance Personnel, e.g. for cleaning purposes.
• The ARRICAM Ground Glasses are not compatible with any other ARRI or MOVIECAM
Ground Glasses.
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
151
The ARRICAM Ground Glass lies flat above the mirror shutter and has a metal holder with a thread in the right front corner.
HANDLING THE GROUND GLASS
Use the ARRICAM Combi Tool to remove or install a
Ground Glass as follows:
Ground Glass mounting
fig.4/42
1. Push the DUST CHECK button in order to move the mirror out of the lens port cavity.
2. Switch the Camera MAIN switch OFF!
3. Screw the Combi Tool into the metal holder of the
Ground Glass.
4. When the Combi Tool is screwed fully home, pull out the Ground Glass gently.
5. Clean the Ground Glass gently with a lens brush or small vacuum cleaner. Using an aerosol spray may be dangerous because of the pressure and the possibility for chemicals to drop on the glass.
6. When screwing the Combi Tool in or out, hold the
Ground Glass holder only.
7. Push the Ground Glass frame gently all the way in until it rests against the stop and then unscrew the
Combi Tool.
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
152
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Notice
Do not touch with fingers or a solid object!
Do not moisten or wipe!
Never place the Ground Glass on its edges.
Do not use force!
THE FRAMEGLOWS
In order to make the frame lines of the Ground Glass visible while shooting dark scenes, ARRI provides small attachments for all Viewfinders called a Frameglow. Three different Frameglows, one for all Lite Viewfinders and two for the Studio Viewfinders, are available. The differences between the Frameglows are not only in the design but also in the technology employed. The difference in design is marked by the engraved letters LT and ST which show on which Viewfinder they can be attached.
The difference in technology is marked by the words LCD or MASK. The Studio LCD Frameglow, is usable only for shooting in Standard 35 format (not for Super 35!), and can only be mounted on a Studio Viewfinder.
With the Studio LCD Frameglow, beside two preset frame outlines, also a reticule can be faded in and out the viewfinder image by pushing the CROSSHAIR button. With the Mask Frameglows, a crosshair is permanently visible if it is marked on the exchangeable Mask.
Last but not least, the brightness of all displayed lines on all three Frameglows can be continuously adjusted by turning the DIMMER knob. When turning the knob counter-clockwise, the brightness will diminish until it is no longer visible in the Viewfinder. Turning the knob all the way clockwise will set the Frameglow outlines and the crosshair of their maximum brightness.
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
153
The brightness of the frame line illumination is independent from the brightness adjustment of the camera displays.
Notice
1. Frameglows cannot be mounted on the 100%
Video Tops.
2. If a Magazine is attached on top of the ARRICAM
Studio, the Lite Frameglow will not fit on the Lite
Viewfinder.
3. On top of the Lite Frameglow, a shoe for accessories as well as a connector for the Lens
Data Display are provided.
MOUNTING THE FRAMEGLOWS
After removing both protection covers, attach the appropriate Frameglow to the Viewfinder with one 3 mm hex screw.
Lite Mask Frameglow
fig.4/43
Lite viewfinder
Lens Data
Display connector
Mounting screw
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
154
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Notice
Care should be taken that:
1. the camera is switched OFF by camera MAIN switch (also important when removing the
Frameglow),
2. the Frameglow sits correctly on the Viewfinder,
3. the pins engage easily in the gauged holes and the connectors are properly seated,
4. both glass surfaces are absolutely clean.
Frameglow Dimmer
fig.4/44
Dimmer
ADJUSTING THE ALIGNMENT OF THE MASK
This operation should be done by the ARRICAM Maintenance Centre before delivering equipment. In the case of a change of shooting format or when the luminous frames are not correctly aligned with the Ground Glass marking, the focus puller can improve the positioning of the frames. All adjustments can be made with a 1.5 mm metric hex wrench. Three adjusting screws allow the fine adjustment to the positioning of the Frameglow Mask.
Caution! Never use force.
Notice
On the Lite Mask Frameglow, a small cover must first be slid away by moving the button in order to access to the adjusting screws.
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
155
Frameglow Adjustment
fig.4/45
Studio Mask
Frameglow
Studio LCD
Frameglow
Mounting screws
Lite Mask
Frameglow
Accessory shoe
Access holes cover bolt
A
B
C
A
B
C
A B
C
Adjusting screws
A B C
Frame brightness adjustment
THE STUDIO LCD FRAMEGLOW
(for Studio Viewfinder only)
Studio LCD Frameglow
fig.4/46
Viewing filter lever Mounting screw
Frame selector 1
Frame selector 2
Crosshair button
Frame brightness adjustment
Access holes for frame alignment
By means of a sophisticated electronic design, the Studio LCD Frameglow fades in one or – simultaneously
– two luminous frames. Four frame outlines with the following aspect ratios are provided in the Studio LCD
Frameglow:
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
156
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
1 : 1.33 (TV)
1 : 1.375 (Academy)
1 : 1.78 (16/9 or HDTV)
1 : 1.85 (US/UK Wide Screen)
HANDLING THE STUDIO LCD FRAMEGLOW
While the camera is powered and no figure is displayed on the Frameglow, just push one of the buttons, so the Studio LCD Frameglow shows the preselected aspect ratio(s). Accordingly, the frame outlines will glow red in the Viewfinder. By pressing either the SELECT 1 or SELECT 2 button, you may step through the aspect ratios preset in the factory. After having displayed four different aspect ratios, the display will extinguish, showing that no aspect ratio has been selected. After five button pushes, the list will repeat. If figures are visible in
FORMAT 1 and FORMAT 2 displays, two aspect ratios are set simultaneously.
The Frameglow memory stores the latest options chosen, even when the camera is disconnected from its power supply.
Notice
In order to save power, the figures displayed on the
Frameglow Module will fade out if no control has been used in the last 5 sec. To reactivate the display, just push one of the buttons.
THE STUDIO & LITE MASK FRAMEGLOWS
Instead of using LCD technology, thE Mask Frameglow inserts the luminous frame outlines of a single or combined aspect ratio(s) into the viewfinder image. A set of
Masks with different aspect ratios and/or aspect ratio combinations is provided by ARRICAM.
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
157
To exchange the Mask, first remove the cover (unscrew the retaining 2 mm screws), then take the Mask out of the receptacle by means of the ARRICAM Combi Tool and slide carefully the requested one into the Mask
Frameglow. Except for three Masks, the same physical
Masks can be used with the Studio or Lite Mask
Frameglows.
Studio & Lite Mask Frameglows
fig.4/47
Frameglow
Mask
Studio Mask
Frameglow
Cover plate
Cover plate
Lite Mask frameglow
4 – THE OPTICAL VIEWFINDER COMPONENTS
158
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
THE INTEGRATED VIDEO SYSTEM COMPONENTS
The Video Assist System
Components
Important notes and safety specifications
• Turn OFF the Video Assist immediately in case of malfunction!
• Do not use in the presence of flammable gas!
• Do not disassemble!
• Use only ARRI cables!
• Use ARRICAM Video Assist components only with
ARRICAM Cameras and only as described in this manual!
• Assembly and initial installation should be carried out only by persons who are familiar with the equipment!
• Remove all cables before transport or servicing!
• Repairs should be carried out only by authorized
ARRICAM Maintenance Centres!
• Use only original ARRI replacement parts and accessories!
• Check all operations on the corresponding monitor!
• In wet weather the normal safety precautions for handling electrical equipment should be taken!
• Keep the equipment dry and free of salt, sand or dust!
• Keep optical surfaces clean!
• Do not remove or turn any screws which are secured with paint!
• Turn the camera MAIN switch OFF before mounting or removing electric components or when connecting or removing the power supply!
• Keep equipment away from strong magnetic fields!
• Avoid sudden changes in temperature!
• Never feed power onto sync or video lines!
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
161
On-Board
Monitors
Video Assist Viewfinders Cameras
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
162
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
The ARRICAM Video Assist System offers more than just a video tap picture. As well as the viewfinder picture, most of the camera status and LDS Lens information can be displayed on the monitor and/or recorded on tape or hard disc. This information, together with the identification of the shot, e.g. provided by the In-camera Slate
Box (ISB), will be useful for further steps in production and post-production. By means of a sophisticated, but intuitive and user-friendly menu, several options can be selected. For example, a flicker compensation, a picture storage capability, a frame line generator and the ability to insert a man and/or machine readable information in the picture are provided.
To access all the different options, only a single dial needs to be operated. However, the main parameters can be changed straightaway by pushing dedicated buttons.
THE ARRICAM VIDEO ASSISTS’ COMPONENTS
Both Studio and Lite Viewfinders have dedicated Video
Assist systems: The Studio Video Assist for Studio Viewfinders and the Lite Video Assist for Lite Viewfinders.
ARRI also provides two small, colour on-board video monitors (2” and 6.6”) which can be mounted on the
ARRICAM Cameras, by means of articulated arms.
THE VIDEO ASSIST
Apart from the different housings, both ARRICAM Video
Assists are identical in their video characteristics and almost similar in handling. Only the position of the
Video Assist iris and the positioning and focusing of the
CCD sensor are different.
Both Video Assists are equipped with lenses that cover the Super 35 acquisition format.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
163
Therefore no mechanical change to the Video Assist needs to be done when changing the format from Standard 35 to Super 35.Depending on the video standard used, each Video Assist component is labelled either PAL or
NTSC. Please be aware that only components working on the same standard are compatible (except the dualstandard 6.6” on-board monitor).
Studio Video Assist – front
fig.5/1
Video signal mode button
White Balance button
White Balance mode LEDs
Signal
LEDs
Mini monitor connector
Mounting
screws
Access hole
MENU/STORE/
MGC dial
Access hole
ON/OFF/
CHECK/
HIDE MENU
Manual Gain
Control button/led switch & LED
CCD adjustment cover screws
Lite Video Assist – front
fig.5/2
MENU/
STORE/
MGC dial
Video signal mode button
White Balance button
White Balance mode LEDs
MINI
MONITOR connector signal LEDs
Manual Gain Control LED
Manual
Gain
Control button
ON/OFF LED
ON/OFF/
CHECK/
HIDE MENU switch
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
164
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Studio Video Assist – top
fig.5/3
MINI MONITOR connector
Accessory shoe
right
MENU/STORE/
MGC dial
Lite Video Assist – top
fig.5/4
Video lens IRIS
Accessory shoe
Video lens IRIS
Access hole for viewfinder release screw
Mounting screws
MENU/STORE/MGC dial
THE 100% VIDEO TOPS
If an Optical Viewfinder is not required, e. g. when the camera is mounted on a Steadicam or a remote head, both Video Assists can be mounted on the ARRICAM
Cameras by means of 100% Video Top. ARRI provides one 100% top for each Video Assist. These 100%
Video Tops are mounted on the camera bodies in the same way as the Viewfinders. Both 100% Video Tops may be used on the STUDIO as well as on the LITE but only with its respective Video Assist.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
165
MOUNTING THE VIDEO ASSISTS
On the two Studio Viewfinders and the Studio 100%
Video Top, the Studio Video Assist is mounted on the right hand side. The Lite Video Assist, specially designed for the two Lite Viewfinders and the Lite 100%
Video Top is be mounted on the top.
Studio Video Assist: mounting
fig.5/5
Threaded holes
Mounting screws
Lite Video Assist: mounting
fig.5/6
Mounting screws
Threaded holes
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
166
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Studio 100% Video Top mounting
fig.5/7
Mounting screws
Studio Video Assist mounting on 100% Video Top
fig.5/8
Mounting screws
Threaded holes
After removing the protection cover (two 3 mm hex screws) and checking that both parts (connectors, glass surfaces) are absolutely free of dust and fingerprints, mount the Video Assist to the Viewfinder or 100% Video
Top. While tightening the screws, the connectors will fit together automatically. Therefore be sure that the Video
Assist sits securely on the Viewfinder or Video Top.
Caution!
Be sure that the camera is not powered during mounting or removing a Video Assist.
Do not slant the Video Assist while mounting it on a Viewfinder or on a 100% Video Top Adaptor!
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
167
THE CONNECTORS AND THE LED INDICATOR
On top of the Studio Video Assist housing, a 4 pin
Fischer connector is covered by a aluminium cap. By lifting this cap, you will be able to connect one of the two
ARRICAM On Board Monitors. On the Lite Video Assist, this Mini Monitor connector is located on the right side of the housing.
Video Assist connector for Mini Monitor
fig.5/9
Composite video out, Pin 3
Signal shield, pin 2
+12 V (1.3 A continous
1.5 A peak, pin 4
GND, pin 1
On the left side of the Video Assists, four connectors and one LED are located:
The LED lights up green when an external video sync signal is successfully fed to the Video Assist – see fig.
5/10 and 5/11.
Notice
When attaching a cable to one of the connectors, be sure not to bend it. Providing a strain relief will do fine.
In order to avoid interference, be sure not to install the video cable close to electric drives, e.g. lens motors.
Be sure the cable has enough slack to accomodate the full range of camera movements, either if it is operated manually or by a remote head! We recommend the use of Y/C cables, which are delivered with the units, for even better image quality.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
168
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Studio Video Assist – rear
fig.5/10
Video out without data or C
Ext. sync led
Lite Video Assist – rear
fig.5/11
Video out without data or C
Video out with data or Y
Ext.sync in
S-video out (Y/C)
Video out with data or Y
S-video out
(Y/C)
Ext.sync in
Ext. sync led
THE VIDEO OUT SIGNAL (BNC CONNECTORS)
By means of the (video signal) BNC MODE button – see fig. 5/1 and 5/2 – you may select the kind of video signal you would like to output. Three options are available and the selected choice will be indicated by an LED.
Studio BNC connectors
fig.5/12
A
Lite BNC connectors
B fig.5/13
A
B
video with data on screen Y= luminance signal
video without data C= chrominance signal
COMP.
Y/C.
Y/C.
composite video with on-screen data composite video without on-screen data
Y portion of the video, with on-screen data
C portion of the video signal, with on-screen data
Y portion of the video, without on-screen data
C portion of the video signal, without on-screen data
A
B
A
B
A
B
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
169
Notice
If you would like the video picture in Black & White, please select either Y/C or and connect the video cable to ”A” output – see fig. 5/12 and
5/13.
Standard BNC connection:
Video Cable Connections
fig.5/14 video assist
BNC cable
video monitor video recorder
THE S-VIDEO SIGNAL
Provided that the monitor has an S-Video connector, using the S-Video signal instead of the composite one will provide an even better video picture. S-Video cables allow connection up to about 3 m/10 ft.
Video Cable Connections
fig.5/15 video assist
S-Video
video monitor video recorder
For longer distances a pair of more durable BNC cables can be used.
Another possibility is to use two BNC cables and an
S-Video adapter cable: Red = C, White = Y
Video Cable Connections
fig.5/16 video assist
BNC cable
BNC cable
video monitor video recorder
S-Video adapter
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
170
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
This configuration will provide the best possible result when the distance between the ARRICAM and the monitor(s) is longer than 10 m/33 ft.
Caution!
The length of the two BNC cables should be roughly the same.
Notice
If video pictures with and without inserted data are
needed simultaneously, e.g. viewing on monitor without data while recording on hard disc with the data inserted, two separate connections must be installed.
Video Cable Connections
fig.5/17 video assist
BNC cable 1
BNC cable 2
video monitor no visible data
(hard disc) recorder video monitor inserted data
Caution!
A standard S-Video connector has no retaining fixture similar to a BNC one. Therefore, the
S-Video connected cable must be secured in order not to slip accidentally out of the connector.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
171
THE EXT. SYNC SIGNAL
When video images are provided from several
ARRICAM Video Assists, e.g. when cameras are used in a multiple camera application and the video images must be mixed together, they should be synchronized.
To do so, a BNC cable must connect the Video Assist e.g. of the camera A with the one of the camera B. The cable will be plugged in a VIDEO OUT connector on camera A and connected to the EXT SYNC IN connector on Camera B. In the Video Config. menu, EXT SYNC
(not TC) has to be selected.
Video Cable Connections
fig.5/18
ARRICAM A video assist
BNC cable
video out (BNC)
BNC cable
ARRICAM B video assist video monitor
A and B mixed video mixing console ext sync in (BNC) monitor video A
(hard disc) recorder monitor video B
Notice
The synchronization provided by connecting a
VIDEO OUT connector to a EXT SYNC IN connector will only affect the video signal. If a synchronization of the ARRICAM Cameras itself is required, please see the dedicated explanations later in this chapter under On Screen Display menu (Sub-menu CAMERA
SYNCED), page 189 or consult chapter 7 – Camera
Control Boxes (synchronization with the Speed
Control Box), page 299.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
172
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
THE MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS OF THE CCD
Notice
This operation should be done by the rental house before delivering equipment. Once set, these adjustments should not move, but if adjustment does become neccessary, the focus puller can improve the alignment and the focus of the video image. Adjustments are made with a 1.5 mm metric hex wrench.
Caution!
Never use force.
CCD ADJUSTMENTS ON THE STUDIO VIDEO ASSIST
In order to access to the controls, first the cover must be removed from the Video Assist by unscrewing two screws with a 1.5 mm metric hex wrench.
Studio Video Assist CCD adjustment
fig.5/19
S2 S1
CCD adjustments cover retaining screws
S3 S4
Three screws allow the fine positioning of the CCD and one screw (S4) moves it in and out to obtain the best possible focus.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
173
Screw S1 moves the video image on the monitor horizontally.
Screw S2 and S3 rotate the image around a point which is located in the middle of the left side respectively right side of the image. To shift the image vertically, you will have to alternate the adjustments of both screws
S2 and S3 to obtain the desired position.
Studio Video Assist image adjustment
fig.5/20
S1
Video image of the groundglass
S1 adjustment
Image on the video monitor
S2
S3
CCD ADJUSTMENT ON THE LITE VIDEO ASSIST
Four 1.5 mm screws to be turned with an metric hex wrench allow the CCD adjustment on the Lite Video Assist.
Lite Video Assist image adjustment
fig.5/21
Accessory shoe
CCD adjustment screws
Video
lens IRIS
IRIS
FOCUS
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
174
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
THE BNC MODE BUTTON AND THE THREE LEDS
See page 169 for explanations.
THE WHITE BALANCE BUTTON AND THE FOUR LEDS
By pushing the WHITE BAL button several times, you cycle through the four options to adapt the Video Assists’
CCD to the lighting conditions (colour temperature) and the photographic conditions (use of compensation or coloured filter).
1. When shooting in daylight condition (about 5.600°K natural daylight, HMI or blue filtered tungsten luminaries) and when no compensation filter is used, you may obtain a good result in selecting OUTDOOR.
If a Wratten 85 or similar filter is used to compensate daylight because the film used is balanced for
3.200°K, selecting INDOOR will offer a good result.
2. When shooting in interior conditions (about 3.200°K electrical light or studio halogen luminaries) and when no coloured filter is used, you should obtain a good result in selecting INDOOR.
3. By selecting AUTO, the electronics will adapt automatically the CCD in order to obtain a ”natural” rendition of the scene.
Notice
When using the AUTO mode for adjusting the white balance, one should be aware that the colour of the
Frameglow will affect the result. So, the more ”red light” that surrounds the frame, the more cyan the video picture will appear.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
175
4. A better result, specially when shooting in mixed lighting situation, will be obtained by using the
MANUAL white balance adaptation. By using this option, you are able to change the white balance settings in the menu. For more details see the WB/
GAIN description on page 183.
THE VIDEO LENS IRIS CONTROL
To control the brightness of the video image, two parameters can be changed on the Video Assist: the video gain setting and the video lens iris adjustment.
The lens of each Video Assist is equipped with an iris to control the amount of light falling on the CCD. However, because of the very effective AGC (Automatic Gain
Control), which works over many f stops, it is suggested to normally leave the Video iris fully open.
THE MGC (MANUAL GAIN CONTROL) BUTTON AND
THE LED
The gain is the electronic amplification of the video signal. Higher gain provides a brighter image but the video picture quality deteriorates with increased video
‘noise’. That may bother the Director and other on the set.
Beacause of this it is preferable to first set the iris of the
Video Assist lens wide open before increasing the gain manually.
Since the Automatic Gain Control (AGC) averages the image brightness, in some lighting situations (strong backlight, for instance) Manual Gain Control (MGC) will yield a better video image. Push the MGC button to toggle between Manual Gain Control (MGC LED ON) and
Automatic Gain Control (MGC LED OFF). When MGC is ON, rotate (do not push it) the dial clockwise to increase or counter-clockwise to decrease the video gain.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
176
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Notice
If the video image looks too dark or if there is too much electronic noise,
• first check the iris setting of the lens on the camera; it should be set for the correct film exposure.
• secondly check the iris setting of the Video Assist; it must be wide open.
• now check if the gain control is set on AGC.
If the video image is still too dark,
• it is possible that the video exposure time is set to
FILM (see submenu VIDEO CONFIG/EXPOS.TIME on page 185), the shutter opening is very small
(e.g. 22.5°) or a high frame rate (e.g. 50 fps) is selected.
• it is possible that a strong light is coming directly into the lens (e.g. strong backlight from a window or from the sun during sunset).
In these cases, switch to MGC (Manual Gain Control) and raise the gain a bit.
ON/OFF/CHECK/HIDE MENU SWITCH AND LED
Before switching ON the video system, first make sure that the camera is powerded ON. Now move the ON/
OFF/CHECK/HIDE MENU switch on the Video Assist to the ON position. The ON LED will light up.
CHECK OR HIDE THE MENU
To display a summary of all options chosen from the menu while the OSD (On Screen Display) is not visible, push the ON/OFF/CHECK/HIDE MENU switch all the way down to CHECK/HIDE MENU. The OSD will automatically fade out after a few sec. To hide the OSD menu, push the ON/OFF/CHECK/HIDE MENU switch
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
177
all the way down to CHECK/HIDE MENU. This is useful if the image needs to be checked while selecting options or making adjustments in the On Screen menu.
See the configuration summary on page 208.
THE MENU/STORE DIAL
In order to navigate through the elaborate menu of the
Video Assist functions, only handling one single userfriendly dial is needed. The dial can be pushed briefly or longer (about 3 sec.) and turned to the left and to the right. By means of these four operations, each one of the video functions can be selected, activated, and stored.
Video Assist – menu/store dial
fig.5/22
MGC
–
MENU/STORE
MGC
+
Notice
1. When the navigation function has not been activated and the Manual Gain Control (MGC) is ON, the dial serves to increase (by turning it clockwise) or decrease (by turning it counterclockwise) the gain level.
2. As soon as the On Screen Display (OSD) is activated (by having pushed the dial for about
3 sec.), there will always be data to all outputs in order to be able to use the menu.
Caution!
By pushing the dial while the OSD is not visible, the actual image will be stored in the Video Assist memory, deleting the previous stored image.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
178
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
While the OSD menu is ON, no changes of the settings by means of the buttons are possible. The data in the inserted windows are not updated.
THE VIDEO ASSIST ON SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD)
Beside the ”normal video tap” function of the ARRICAM
Video Assist System, many features are offered to the users in order to facilitate not only the work on the set, but also the processes in post production houses.
In order to adjust the various settings, first you have to make yourself familiar with the easy to use navigation system. To navigate, only the MENU/STORE dial is used; it is either pushed or turned.
Notice
No OSD is available while the camera is RUNNING.
By pushing the dial briefly while the OSD is visible, you will activate the function or option marked by the menu-cursor
–>
.
By pushing the dial for about 3 sec. – this can be done at any time – you will either open or close the On Screen Menu. While closing the OSD, the latest displayed options are automatically activated.
By turning the dial, you will either:
• move the menu-cursor
–>
,
• move the character-cursor
X
,
• change the option between e.g.
ON
, and
OFF
,
SMALL
, and
LARGE
, etc.
• adjust a value, e.g. from
48
to
12
or to
54
,
• position a line, a frame or a window on the display.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
179
THE MENU STRUCTURE
The menu is structured dynamically. This means that the various related levels (Sub-menus) will appear automatically when a higher menu level is selected. The first level
– the Main Menu list (A) – will appear when the dial is pushed for about 3 sec.
The cursor
–>
will face one of the Sub-menu titles. By turning the dial, the cursor will scroll up and down.
Each of the Sub-menus offers different options. By pushing the dial, the selected Sub-menu will show its list of options (B). Each option offers the possibility of selecting one of several settings (C) listed on the third level.
On each displayed level, the option EXIT, is provided.
By selecting exit and pushing the dial shortly, you will climb the program to the next superior level (D). When you push more than 3 sec., the latest changes will be activated and the OSD will fade out.
(A)
–> MENU 1
MENU 2
MENU 3
MENU 4
MENU 5
EXIT
(B)
OPTION 1
OPTION 2
–> OPTION 3
OPTION 4
EXIT
(C)
SET 1 = OFF
–> SET 2 = HIGH
SET 3 = 48
EXIT
(D)
SET 1 = ON
OFF
SET 2 = LOW
HIGH
SET 3 = XX
EXIT
(xx = 0 to 99)
THE CURSOR
While turning the dial, the cursor
–>
will move from line to line. As soon as the desired option is reached,
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
180
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
a short push on the dial will select it. Remember, if the dial is pushed longer than 3 sec., the OSD will fade out. When an option is selected, all its functions and settings will appear in a list. Now a function or a setting can be selected by turning the dial.
When the cursor
–>
shows a function, a push on the dial will activate this function and the setting can be chosen again by turning the dial. While pushing the dial briefly, the selected setting is confirmed.
The navigation in the menu is very simple and, because of its logical structure, can be learned in a few minutes.
THE SETTINGS
By turning the dial, the following changes can be made:
Changing of options: e.g. ON > OFF; LIGHT > DARK
Cycling several preset settings: e.g. SMALL > MEDIUM
> LARGE; DEFAULT > CONFIG USER1 > CONFIG
USER 2 > etc.
Changing of position: e.g. vertical shift, horizontal shift
Entering text: while turning the dial, the character-cursor
X
will mutate to letters and numbers. As soon as the desired character is On Screen, it will be saved and the cursor will move left to the next possible place by pushing the dial briefly.
Leaving the OSD menu: There are two ways to exit the menu:
1. To leave the actual menu level and to return to one menu level higher, move the cursor to EXIT and push the dial.
2. To close all menus and to leave the On Screen Display, push the dial for about 3 sec.
Notice
The menu can be left at any time.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
181
Caution!
The following menu description is related to the
Software Version V2.04 Dec. 2002. To be sure that the latest software is installed, please check
it by selecting the Sub-menu CONFIG SET. See
page 207.
THE FIRST LEVEL – THE MAIN MENU
MAIN MENU
–> CONFIG = 1 (USR1 )
WB/GAIN
VIDEO CONFIG
FORMAT MARKING
COMPARE/STORE
TEXT INSERTER
VITC/WHITELINE
CONFIG SET
EXIT
THE SECOND AND FURTHER LEVELS –
THE SUB-MENUS
MAIN MENU
–> CONFIG = 1 (USR1 )
CONFIG
By pushing the MENU/STORE dial for about 3 sec., the first menu level will appear. On top of the menu window, the name of the actual displayed level (here
MAIN MENU) is indicated.
In the first line the cursor shows
CONFIG = 1 (USR1 )
. Beside the possibility to use the default configuration
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
182
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
= 0
, the MAIN MENU offers the possibility of selecting between six customised configurations available in the
Video Assist memory.
The settings of these six configurations (WB/GAIN,
VIDEO CONFIG, FORMAT MARKING, COMPARE/
STORE, TEXT INSERTER and VITC/WHITE LINE) will be done with the Sub-menu CONFIG SET – see pages
182–209. There, the six individually preset configurations will automatically be numbered from 1 to 6 and you may also add a name for them in the brackets. The memory will save the configurations even when the camera is not powered.
Notice
To check a summary of the settings saved in the memory (see page 209) of the selected configuration, close the OSD by pushing the dial for 3 sec. and push the ON/OFF/CHECK/HIDE MENU switch all the way down to CHECK/HIDE MENU position.
MAIN MENU
–> WB/GAIN
WB/GAIN
While activating the WB/GAIN Sub-menu, you will be able to manually adjust the colour balance and the gain of the Video Assist. For ”normal use”, the selection of the colour balance as well as the gain can be made using the WHITE BAL button as well as the MGC button. The
OSD menu allows fine adjustments of all preset settings besides the default one. By selecting e.g. IND. RED in the WB=INDOOR Sub-menu, you will be able to alter the factory presetting by reducing or raising the value in a range of 0 to 99.
If the individual factory setting of the colour saturation is e.g. 52, you will be able to change it from 52 to 0
(–52 steps) or 52 to 99 (+47 steps).
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
183
In AUTOMATIC, the electronics will analyse the light entering the camera and offer a neutral rendering of the colours, e.g.
–> WB = AUTOMATIC
INDOOR
OUTDOOR
MANUAL
▼
WB = MANUAL
MAN. RED = 50 + 00
MAN. BLUE = 50 + 00
▼
WB = OUTDOOR
OUT. RED = 38 + 00
OUT. BLUE = 51 + 00
▼
WB = INDOOR
IND. RED = 52 + 00
IND. BLUE = 43 + 00
In the same way, the MANUAL GAIN can be adjusted in a range from 0 to 99.
GAIN = AGC
= MGC
GAIN = MGC
MANUAL GAIN = 0
MAIN MENU
–> VIDEO CONFIG
VIDEO CONFIG
The VIDEO CONFIG Sub-menu allows the selection of several options related either to the video image rendering, the signal provided by the Video Assist or the synchronization of the camera.
MENU VIDEO CONFIG
–> FLICKERFREE
EXPOS. TIME
LINE INTERP.
Y/C (SVHS) DATA
MINI MON. DATA
VID SYNC
CAMERA SYNCED
PHASE 0 – 356
EXIT
= ON
= FILM
= ON
= ON
= OFF
= EXT (NOT TC)
= OFF
= 0.0
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
184
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
MAIN MENU
FLICKERFREE
–> FLICKERFREE = ON
= OFF
VIDEO CONFIG
The flicker effect on video monitor results from the difference between the frame rate of the film camera and that of the Video Assist. In selecting the option ON, the flicker will be fully eliminated. This is achieved by storing the digital image into a video frame storage while the mirror is in the viewing position and then displaying this picture in the correct timing of the video system. The
FLICKERFREE option works when the frame rate of the camera is set faster than 1 fps.
Notice
The storage of the digital image causes a slight delay, which is not desirable in some crucial time conditions, e.g. motion control or shooting singers or musicians with play-back sound. Therefore it is possible to select the FLICKERFREE = OFF option.This will
eliminate the delay at expense of the return of flicker.
Caution!
The time-code information such as time-code, user bits, VITC and WHITELINE is not valid if FLICKER-
FREE = OFF is selected.
VIDEO CONFIG MAIN MENU
EXPOS. TIME
–> EXPOS. TIME = FIXED
= FILM
When the mode FIXED is selected, the exposure time of the CCD will automatically be calculated accordingly to the formula 1/(fps x 2) regardless whether the
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
185
video standard is PAL or NTSC. The shutter opening is considered 180° fixed. Example: the fps rate is 24; the exposure time will be 1/(24 x 2) = 1/48 Sec.
In selecting the option FILM, the Video Assist electronics calculates the film exposure time while the film camera is in Standby status, by calculating to the preset frame rate and the preset shutter aperture. So for example, if
30 fps and 90° shutter angle are selected, the resulting exposure time will be 1/120 sec. In toggling between
FIXED and FILM exposure time, you will see a difference in the image brightness.
A practical use of the option FILM is the ”video visualization” of motion blur and stroboscopic effect that will be recorded on film.
HOW TO PREVIEW MOTION BLUR OR
STROBOSCOPIC EFFECT
When a fast moving object is filmed with a slow frame rate and a wide open shutter angle, the object will appear blurred on film. This is called motion blur. The more motion blur will affect the picture, the less the stroboscopic effect will be perceptible. The amount of motion blur or stroboscopic effect generated by the combination of fps, shutter angle, camera movement and object movement can be previewed with the ARRICAM
Video Assist System.
• Remove the magazine from the camera to save film.
• In the VIDEO CONFIG Sub-menu, set FLICKERFREE to ON.
• In the VIDEO CONFIG Sub-menu, set EXPOS. TIME to FILM.
• Exit the On Screen menu.
• RUN the camera.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
186
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Now you see a close approximation of the motion blur or the stroboscopic effect that will be exposed on film.
Varying degrees of motion blur can be achieved by changing camera speed, shutter angle, lighting contrast and the speed with which objects move through the image. Motion blur is most visible at slow camera speeds and at wide open shutter angles (try for instance
6 fps and 180°). Stroboscopic effect is most visible when the shutter angle is narrow (between 45° and
11,25°) and the object and/or the camera is/are moving fast.
MAIN MENU
LINE INTERP.
VIDEO CONFIG
–> LINE INTERP. = ON
= OFF
In order to enhance the quality of the Video Assist picture, you may virtually double the vertical resolution in adding so called interpolated lines.
MAIN MENU
Y/C (SVHS) DATA
–> Y/C (SVHS) DATA = ON
= OFF
VIDEO CONFIG
By selecting ON, the video image supplied by the Y/C
(S-VHS) connector will include the data information.
MAIN MENU
MINI MON. DATA
–> MINI MON. DATA = ON
= OFF
VIDEO CONFIG
By selecting ON, the video image supplied by the On
Board Monitor connector will include the data information.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
187
MAIN MENU
VID SYNC
VIDEO CONFIG
–> VID SYNC = EXT (NOT TC)
= TC
With this menu, the reference used to synchronize the
Video Assist can be selected.
Notice
Without selecting CAMERA SYNCED ON (VID,
TC), this synchronization is only related to the Video
Assist, not to that of the camera! Therefore, the external sync signal must be fed in the Video Assist connector and not into the Speed Control Box.
While selecting EXT, the Video Assist will be synchronized to an external signal e.g. video or clock fed in the
EXT. SYNC IN BNC connector. The green LED located next to the connector will light up to indicate that the incoming synchronization signal is OK.
If EXT is selected, either a standard video composite or a TTL (0 and 5 V) signal should be fed in the EXT SYNC
IN connector.
The range of frequencies is 25 or 50 Hz for the PAL standard and 30 or 60 Hz for the NTSC standard.
A divergence smaller than ± 0.1% is tolerated. The input impedance will automatically switch between
10 K Ω for TTL and 75 Ω for video signals.
If TC is selected, the reference used to synchronize the
Video Assist is generated by the In-camera Slate Box
(ISB). Therefore this box must be mounted on the camera and the switch set to ON (TC mode). If no ISB is mounted or if the switch is not set to TC mode, this option will not appear on the OSD.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
188
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Caution!
If no usable external signal is fed to the EXT.
SYNC IN connector, the Video Assist will run on its own internal oscillator.
The LED next to the connector will show by lighting green if the signal is suitable. The use of the
ARRI Pick-up Unit in connection with the Video
Assist connector is not possible.
MAIN MENU
CAMERA SYNCED
–> CAMERA SYNCED = OFF
= VID
= TC
VIDEO CONFIG
With this Sub-menu, the synchronization reference of the film camera can be selected.
OFF means that the reference signal is provided by the film camera’s own quartz crystal generator.
VID means that the film camera will use the video signal for synchronization.
By selecting TC, the film camera will be synchronized with the time-code generated in the In-camera Slate
Box.
Caution!
TC selection is only possible when an In-camera
Slate Box is connected.
Whenever the Video Assist is switched ON, the
CAMERA SYNCED function is always set to OFF in order to avoid wrong speed.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
189
MAIN MENU
PHASE 0 – 356
–> PHASE 0 – 356 = 0.0
VIDEO CONFIG
When VID is selected in the CAMERA SYNCED Submenu, the next menu level PHASE 0 – 356 allows to adjust the phase between the external sync signal and the film camera. By turning the dial, the phase can be adjusted with increments of 3.6° in a range 0° to 356.4°.
MAIN MENU
–> FORMAT MARKING
FORMAT MARKING
The FORMAT MARKING Sub-menu allows to design and insert one or two sets of frame lines – either individually or simultaneously – into the Video Assist image. As well as the following already programmed and named aspect ratios, the Sub-menu allows the design of a further twelve frames which can be labelled individually.
FORMAT No. NAME ASPECT RATIO
1 TV 4:3 1:1.333
2 TV 16:9 1:1.777
3 1.85 1:1.85
4 2.35 1:2.35
Even with the four listed frames, their sizes, their brightness and their positions on the TV screen can be adjusted. The positioning allows precise lining up the electronic frames with the Ground Glass Format Markings.
Notice
If the electronic Format Markings are not parallel to the Ground Glass Format Markings, readjust the CCD chip with the Adjusting screws as explained on
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
190
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
page 173. Be aware that first the Ground Glass Format Markings must be positioned on the TV monitor by means of the CCD chip adjustment before positioning the generated frame lines. It is recommended to point the film camera towards a plain, bright surface and to turn OFF the Frameglow so that the Format Markings on the Ground Glass are clearly visible.
Furthermore, the appearance of the surrounding area of one of the selected frames can be adjusted accordingly to the users needs.
MENU FORMAT MARKING
FORMAT 1
= FRAME 1(TV 4:3 )
–> FORMAT 2
= OFF
WHITELEVEL = DARK
OUTS. AREA = BRIGHT
CONFIG FORMAT 1
RESET FORMAT 1 = YES
EXIT
The following explanations are valid for both FORMATs and for all FRAMEs
MAIN MENU MENU FORMAT MARKING
FORMAT 1
–> = FRAME 1 (TV 4:3 )
While FRAME is activated and the dial turned, all the preset configurations related to this selected FORMAT will appear cyclical.
OFF will appear at the end of the list; it can be activated if no frame saved under the selected FORMAT is to be inserted.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
191
MAIN MENU
–> WHITELEVEL = DARK
= MEDIUM
= BRIGHT
MENU FORMAT MARKING
While WHITELEVEL is activated, the brightness of the frame lines can be adjusted.
MAIN MENU
MENU FORMAT MARKING
–> OUTS. AREA = BLACK
= DARK
= BRIGHT
= VIDEO
While OUTS. AREA is activated, the brightness of the surrounding of the selected frame can be adjusted.
While selecting VIDEO, the video image will appear accordingly to the settings bright or dark. If BLACK is selected, the surrounding will show no video images but only a neutral black surface.
Notice
This function is only available if only FORMAT 1 or
FORMAT 2 is activated. No darkening function is available if there is no FORMAT Marking or if two
FORMAT Markings are switched ON.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
192
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
MAIN MENU
MENU FORMAT MARKING
CONFIG FORMAT
MENU CONFIG FORMAT 1
NAME = 1(TV 4:3 )
MOVE LINES
ALL
–> HORIZONTAL
VERTICAL
LEFT
RIGHT
TOP
BOTTOM
EXIT
The Sub-menu CONFIG FORMAT 1 (or 2) allows the design and labelling of a frame.
While NAME is activated, it is possible to select the already displayed name, to clear it and to set a new one.
A cursor will indicate where characters can be placed.
While ALL is activated, turning the dial will either increase or decrease the size of the frame.
While HORIZONTAL or VERTICAL is activated, the whole frame can be positioned.
MAIN MENU
MENU FORMAT MARKING
CONFIG FORMAT
FORMAT 1
–> = FRAME 1 (TV 4:3 )
Beside the possibility to change the size and position of a frame, each line (LEFT, RIGHT, TOP, BOTTOM) can be positioned individually. How to write a CONFIG
NAME is described on page 207.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
193
MAIN MENU
MENU FORMAT MARKING
CONFIG FORMAT
–> RESET FORMAT = YES
= NO
= UNDO
While RESET FORMAT is activated, the actual frame design can be reset to the factory default setting.
While selecting UNDO, the last changes will be deleted and the previous setting activated.
UNDO is only available when the OSD has not been left before.
MAIN MENU
–> COMPARE/STORE
COMPARE/STORE
The Video Assist allows the storage of one image in its own memory (the stored image) and to compare it with the image currently displayed (the live image). The stored image will remain in the memory as long as the
Video Assist is powered and obviously as long as it is not replaced by a new image.
MENU COMPARE STORE
–> VIEW MODE =
STORE IMAGE
CLEAR IMAGE
EXIT
LIVE
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
194
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Three options are provided in the VIEW MODE:
LIVE the live image is shown on the video monitor
STORED the stored image is shown on the video monitor rapid alternation on the video monitor.
Notice
• Whenever the Video Assist is turned ON, the “live” image is displayed.
• It is always possible, the dial by pushing for 1 sec., to store an image, even though the OSD is not activated. Therefore it is not necessary to enter the menu for storring an image.
• When showing the two images simultaneously, the
Video Assist will interlace the pictures. This option offers the possibility to compare both images but a moiré effect can occur in certain situations.
MAIN MENU
–> STORE IMAGE – STORE
DONE
COMPARE/STORE
While the menu-cursor points towards STORE, pushing the dial briefly will store the actual image and DONE will appear.
MAIN MENU
–> CLEAR IMAGE
COMPARE/STORE
While the menu-cursor points towards CLEAR, pushing the dial briefly will delete the stored image.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
195
MAIN MENU
–> TEXT INSERTER
TEXT INSERTER
The Video Assist enables the display of a number of windows containing assorted data on the video monitor.
In each window, the size and appearance of the data can be set. The position of each window can also be individually adjusted.
MENU TEXT INSERTER
–> SYSTEM/LDS/STATUS
TIME CODE
TC USER BITS
USER TEXT LINE
PULL DOWN
WHITELEVEL =
BRIGHT
INVERS =
OFF
SET TO DEF. =
NO
While VERT: FINE POSITION is activated, all visible data can be precisely positioned vertically.
MAIN MENU
SYSTEM/LDS/STATUS
TEXT INSERTER
SYSTEM LINE = OFF
= ON
LDS LINE = OFF
= ON
STATUS LINE = OFF
= ON
VERTICAL POSITION
BACKGRD. = BLACK/WHITE
= VIDEO
FILM COUNTER = REMAIN
= FOOTAGE
= TAKE
= OFF
EXIT
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
196
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
While one of the three options has been activated, you may, by turning and pushing the dial, choose if the selected line should be inserted on the video screen or not. Within the three windows, the following data will appear:
Examples of displayed data
SYSTEM LINE - filter in the gate
- movement open
LDS LINE - actual iris
- actual focal
- actual focus
- near (depth of field)
- far (depth of field)
or “no lens”
STATUS LINE - actual voltage of the power supply
- camera status
(RUN, STAND BY, NOT READY)
- shooting direction (FWD, REV)
- actual/preset fps
- actual shutter opening
- film length (remain, exposed, take)
While all three lines are selected and an In-camera
Slate Box is activated, the slate data will appear for a few seconds in these lines at the beginning and end of each take. Time-code and userbits have their own individual windows.
The three lines labelled SYSTEM, LDS and STATUS are parts of one block. While one of the lines is activated, the entire block will be moved by turning the dial at once.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
197
Video Assist data – markings display
fig.5/23
Generated format frame surrounding
Format frame surrounding groundglass
Time-code
Generated format frame (1:1.78)
Userbits Pull-down
User text line
11:24:30/03 100297C1 A1
Prod. Name Unit A Take 35 Scene 11/III
Filter in the gate
UP65 65mm 11+9/10 7.17m( 4.20m– 22.10m)
24.6 V STBY FWD 0.0/24.0 fps 180.0 267 m
System line
Crosshair Image area
LDS line Status line
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
198
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
While BACKGRD is activated, either the video image or a box can be selected. The background box will be black or white depending if the INVERSE option has been selected OFF or ON.
While one of the windows is activated, e.g. the
SYSTEM LINE, its background colour can be switched between black or white.
In the STATUS LINE, a FILM COUNTER will display either REMAIN (raw stock length), FOOTAGE (exposed film length), TAKE (length of the last take) or OFF (no data are shown). Depending on the preset unit on the magazine, either “meters” or “feet” will be shown. If the counter is set to TAKE, also the amount of frames can be displayed.
MAIN MENU
TEXT INSERTER
TIME CODE
TC USER BITS
USER TEXT LINE
PULL DOWN
TIME CODE
The time-code (TC) is the identification of a video image in relation to the time of its generation. To create a timecode, the In-camera Slate Box electronics must be set with a clock.
If no In-camera Slate Box is connected to the camera, or if the ISB switch is not set to TC, this option will not be shown on the OSD.
Caution!
It is recommended to check the requirements of all facilities involved in post-production prior to shooting.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
199
The ARRICAM Video Assist can insert the film camera’s time-code into the video image to create a direct link to the post-production. It is possible to insert the time-code, which is related to the film camera speed e.g. 24 fps or to a time-code which counts according to the type of
Video Assist used: 25 full video frames per sec. with PAL or 30 full video frames per sec. with NTSC.
Several Video Assists can be either synchronized or individually set by means of the same clock. If a number of Video Assists are synchronized, one will be called the master and the other ones slaves. So, e.g., one of the ARRICAM Cameras or the sound recorder can be the master – the other cameras will be slaved. If the
ARRICAM Cameras are equipped with In-camera Slate
Boxes, no permanent cable connection is necessary (to maintain synchronization) after having set the internal clocks – see page 319, chapter 8 – In-camera Slate
System. The time-code identification numbers contain two digits for the hours, two digits for the minutes, two digits for the seconds and two digits for the frames. The last two numbers are provided by a counter.
THE FRAME COUNTER
This counter can be set to count either the FILM or the
VIDEO frames. Depending on the preset fps, the FILM counter will count from 0 to the maximal frame rate; e.g. if the camera is set to 35 fps, it will count from 0 to
34. When it is set to VIDEO, the counter will display the amount of video fields.
Very often the camera is set to RUN at a different frame rate than the video system. In areas with NTSC video standard for example, the film camera would RUN at
24 fps whereas the video system works with 30 full
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
200
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
video frames per sec. In order to adapt it to the specific needs, there are two different time-code formats possible.
To have the time-code related to the film camera, select the mode FRAME COUNTER FILM, which is often referred to as ”film related time-code”. In this mode, the frame counter of the time-code (the last two digits of the
TC display) is increased by 1 if the film is advanced by one frame e.g. 24 times in a sec. at 24 fps. By this, it is easy to identify one particular film frame by looking at the video image. On the other hand, this mode will create an unusual time-code count because some video images are duplicated to cope with the different frame rates of the video and the film camera. These repeated images will get duplicated time-code words which will create error messages on some time-code readers.
To relate the time-code count to the video system, select mode FRAME COUNTER VIDEO. This is often referred to as ”video related time-code”. Every full video frame will advance the time-code by e.g. 25 times a sec. in
PAL or 30 times a sec. in NTSC. By this the ARRICAM
Video Assist creates a standard time-code. On the other hand, it is more difficult to get the link back to the timecode, whose “start cue” and “end cue” was exposed on film by the ISB. To get a reliable relation, it is necessary to utilize the Pull-down – see page 202 – or Whiteline flag information – see page 205.
At every full sec., both time-code counts are identical!
Notice
The FRAME COUNTER FILM is identified with a slash:
11:24:30/03
The FRAME COUNTER VIDEO is identified with a colon:
11:24:30:03
While the camera is not RUNNING or when the time-code Generator built into the connected ISB
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
201
is not working properly, two symbols will appear instead of the frame counter.
11:24:30/
**
Caution!
• When no In-camera Slate Box is installed on the camera, no TC window is available.
• Time-code is only valid when the option
FLICKERFREE is set to ON! – see page 185.
THE USERBITS
As well as the eight digits of the time-code, a further eight digits can be used for additional information.
These eight digits are called userbits (UB) because the user can define the kind of displayed information. Userbits can be entered in the system either with a handheld
PC/laptop or by means of a time-code generator. Userbits can contain the numbers 0–9 and the letters A–F.
Example:
Video Assist time-code
fig.5/24 time-code
11:24:30/03
userbits
100297C1 userbits
hours minutes seconds frames free definable figures
THE PULL-DOWN
The Video Assist can generate information on whether the current video image corresponds with a new film frame or it is a repeated video image. The pull-down information displays it in man readable form.
All Video Assists are based either on PAL or NTSC video standard, with a fixed video frequency of either
25 full video frames per second with PAL or
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
202
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
29.97 full video frames per sec. with NTSC. The frame rate of the film camera on the other hand can be selected over a wide range. At every film frame rate which is different from the video frequency, the Video Assist has to add repeated video fields (1 field is 1/2 video frame) to compensate for the different frame rate. In practice the most important case is a film camera frame rate of 23.976 fps and a NTSC Video Assist. This creates a situation described in the fig 5/25.
From the first film frame, two video fields are derived, the second film frame, three video fields are derived, from the next film frame, two video fields and so on.
The pull-down information is created as follows:
Every time, the video field corresponds with a new film frame, the letter will change either from A to B to A and the number will be set to 1. As long as no new film frame is taken, the video fields are counted, beginning from 1. Consequently A2 is the first repetition of A1,
B2 would be the first repetition of B1, B3 would be the second repetition. In spite of the fact that the name pull-down comes from the working practice in the NTSC system, where on a telecine the film is RUNNING on
23.976 fps and gets converted to 29.97 fps, the definition of pull-down information on the Video Assist can also be applied to PAL and to film frame rates other than
23.976 fps.
Like all man readable information, the data can be inserted as a window on the monitor.
Notice
Pull-down information is only inserted when time-code is actually exposed on film. If there is no time-code exposing, for example because the film camera is not RUNNING on a time-code speed, only A1 will be displayed.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
203
Pull-down diagram
fig.5/25
Frame 4
Frame 3
Frame 2
Frame 1
Film frames
B3
B2
▼
B1
A2
▼
A1
B3
B2
▼
B1
A2
A1
Video fi elds
MAIN MENU
–> USER TEXT LINE
TEXT INSERTER
While USER TEXT LINE is activated, a new line and a character-cursor
X
appear. The line has the width of the video screen.
–> EDIT TEXT
In activating EDIT TEXT, three short lines appear. By turning the dial, the cursor moves back and forward. By pushing the dial, a character appears on the position marked by the cursor. While turning the dial, you will be able to select a letter, a number or a symbol. By pushing the dial, the chosen character will be saved and the cursor will be activated again.
Notice
While writing the user text, briefly push the dial, otherwise the OSD menu will fade out.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
204
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
WINDOWS ADJUSTMENTS
Following settings and adjustments can be done for most Sub-menu windows and characters:
• While one window is activated, you may select ON to display it or OFF to fade it out.
• While either HORIZONTAL or VERTICAL POSITION is activated, the position of the windows can be adjusted accordingly. By activating VERT. FINE POSI-
TION a precisely vertical positioning of all windows is possible.
• Most characters or windows can be set SMALL,
MEDIUM or LARGE when SIZE is activated.
• The characters or windows can be shown with either black on white background or reverse.
• The brightness of the white background or digits can be adjusted when WHITE LEVEL is activated.
MAIN MENU
–> VITC/WHITELINE
VITC/WHITELINE
VITC
Time-code information can be man and machine readable – the first one is the TC window as described on page 199, the other takes the form of LTC. (Linear Timecode) or VITC. (Vertical Interval Time-code). The Video
Assist can convert the visible TC into a VITC and place it in non active video lines.
WHITELINE
The Video Assist can generate information on whether the current video image corresponds with a new film frame or whether it is a repeated video image. The
WHITELINE flag displays this in machine readable form.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
205
Notice
The time-code that is used (film related TC or video related TC) depends on the settings of the line
FRAME COUNTER in the Sub-menu TIME CODE
– see page 200.
VITC and WHITELINE are only outputted if the timecode is actually exposed on film. This happens only when the camera is equipped with the In-camera
Slate Box and the camera RUNS at a TC speed.
The WHITELINE has priority over the VITC lines. If the same line is selected for WHITELINE as well as for
VITC, WHITELINE will appear.
MENU VITC/WHITELINE
–> VITC = ON
LINE 1 = 10
LINE 2 = 12
WHITELINE = ON
LINE = 11
EXIT
Both lines, the VITC and the WHITELINE, can be individually activated or deactivated by setting ON or OFF in the Sub-menu.
Both lines can be positioned vertically by turning the dial when the related LINE is activated.
The insertion of the VITC can be a single line or multiple lines between line 6 and 22. If the same position is selected for LINE 1 and LINE 2, the insertion will be a single line, otherwise multiple lines.
The insertion of the single WHITELINE must be chosen between line 6 and 22. Avoid placing the WHITELINE on the same position as the VITC line(s).
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
206
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
MAIN MENU
–> CONFIG SET
CONFIG SET
By pushing the dial, the option to (re)name a configuration is given. By turning the dial, you will cycle the six names already saved in the memory. As soon as a name appears that should be changed, you may edit it by activating EDIT NAME.
SET NAME INDIVIDUAL
NAME = 4 (TEST )
> x <
The name can be deleted (CLEAR NAME) and the selected configuration can be put to TO DEFAULT.
Whilst activated, you will have three options to chose from: YES, NO or UNDO.
Furthermore, if you would like to erase a setting and replace it by the default setting, you will be asked if you are sure about it.
The TO DEFAULT configuration cannot be renamed.
In choosing SET LIKE, you can assign a previous setting to the actual configuration.
MENU CONFIG SET
SW VERSION = 1.11
CONFIG = 2(USR2 )
EDIT NAME
CLEAR NAME = UNDO
SET LIKE (NO )
TO DEFAULT = NO
EXIT
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
207
MAIN MENU
–> EXIT
EXIT
You may select EXIT at the bottom of each menu level
(Main or Sub-menus) to leave the actual level and to access one menu level higher. While being in the Main
Menu, you will close the OSD by activating EXIT.
CHECKING THE CONFIGURATION
While the OSD menu is OFF and the ON/OFF/
CHECK/HIDE MENU switch is pressed all the way down, a summary of the actual configuration, of the
VIDEO STATUS, will be screened.
EXP Video exposure mode
FLCK Flickerfree
FORMAT 1 Frame 1 aspect ratio
FORMAT 2 Frame 2 aspect ratio
GAIN Manual CG or Automatic CG
LDS LDS Line
LIP Line Interpolation
MODE Compare LIVE or STORE
PD Pull-down
STATUS Status Line
SYS. MSG System Line
TC Time-code
UB Userbits
UT User Text
VITC Vertical Interval Time-code
WB White Balance
WL Whiteline
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
208
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Example:
VIDEO STATUS
WB = AUTOMATIC
FLCK = ON MODE = LIVE
EXP = FILM LIP = ON
FORMAT 1 = 1 SYS. MSG = ON
FORMAT 2 = OFFSTATUS = ON
LDS = ON
UT = OFF TC = OFF PD = OFF
UB = OFF WL = ON VITC = ON
EXIT
Caution!
The OSD will be switched OFF automatically when the camera starts UP.
THE ON BOARD VIDEO MONITORS
ARRI provides three ARRI LCD Colour Monitors which can be mounted on and connected to both Video
Assists. The 2” On Board Monitor is available in either
NTSC or PAL standard. Be sure to have the correct one before leaving the rental house. The 6.6” On Board
Monitor operates both video standards.
Caution!
ARRICAM On Board Monitors are not compatible with the MOVIECAM Video Assist.
The 2” ON BOARD VIDEO MONITOR
The 2” On Board Monitor is mounted on a ball joint.
This attachment, fixed on a small bracket, can be mounted on several Accessory shoes on both cameras where it is tightened by a screw. The tension of the ball joint can be regulated by turning the ring. Turn the On
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
209
Board Monitor ON and OFF with the ON/OFF switch.
Colour saturation, colour hue (NTSC only), brightness and contrast can be adjusted with four rotary knobs.
2“ On Board Monitor
fig.5/26
Tightening screw
Contrast
Brightness
Colour saturation
Colour hue
(NTSC only)
On/off switch
Tension control
Caution!
This 2” Video Monitor is primarily concieved for shooting Standard 35 format. While shooting in a
Super 35 format smalll portions of the image are not visible on the left and right.
The 6.6” VIDEO ON BOARD MONITOR
The 6.6” On Board Monitor is mounted on an extension arm. This fixture can be mounted on several Accessory shoes on both cameras and is capable of hanging the
On Board Monitor upside down. In this case, push the
UPSIDE DOWN button to flip the image.
Caution!
Because of the possible extension of the articulated arm, secure firmly the two tightening screws.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
210
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
6.6“ On Board Monitor
fig.5/27
Menu on button
Upside down button
On/off switch
Tightening screws
Menu button (+) and contrast +
Menu button (-) and contrast -
Menu button (UP) and brightness +
Menu button (DOWN) and brightness -
CONNECTING THE ON BOARD MONITORS
Be sure that the 2” On Board Monitor has the same standard (PAL, NTSC) as the Video Assist. The 6.6”
On Board Monitor automatically detects and switches between PAL and NTSC standards.
2“ On Board Monitor, mounting
fig.5/28
Studio Video Assist
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
211
A collapsible Sunshade can be attached with velcro to the 6.6“ Video Monitor.
6.6“ On Board Monitor, connecting
fig.5/29
Studio Video Assist
2“ On Board Monitor, mounting
fig.5/30
Lite Video Assist
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
212
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
6.6“ On Board Monitor, mounting
fig.5/31
Lite Video Assist
Caution!
Be sure that the camera is not powered when connecting or disconnecting a Video Monitor.
Notice
While powering up a On Board Monitor, the image on an external monitor might disappear briefly.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
213
CONTROL MENU OF THE 6.6” ON BOARD MONITOR
Preliminary remark
Beside the menu of the ARRICAM Video Assist, the 6.6”
On Board Monitor’s adjustments can also be monitored by means of its own menu displayed on the screen (OSD).
After the On Board Monitor is powered up, push the
menu button on the right side to open the On Screen
Display (OSD).
To leave the OSD, wait for it to time out. The time can be set in the Menu utilities/OSD time out.
The OSD allows the configuration of the video image on the On Board Monitor. This local configuration will not influence the images on other video screens. The menu is structured in two levels: on the left side the Main
Menu and on the right the Sub-menus.
Four buttons make it easy to navigate through the menu and to set all the parameters. The principle of navigation is very simple: first select and confirm one of the four options in the Main Menu by pushing the contrast+ and contrast- buttons. To change into the related Sub-menu, press the menu button. After having selected and activated one of the parameters to be changed, the desired setting can be done by pushing the brightness+ and brightness- buttons. The activated menu or parameter will be highlighted.
By leaving the Main Menu, a Sub-menu or the OSD, all changes will be saved and activated. This happens also when the OSD turns OFF automatically as programmed in time out in the Sub-menu utilities.
Notice
By means of the four buttons, the brightness and the contrast can also be adjusted directly – entering the
OSD menu is therefore not necessary.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
214
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
picture advanced utilities options brightness 50 – + contrast 50 – + color 50 – + tint 50 – + sharpness 50 – + scaling 1
In the picture Main Menu:
Being in the Sub-menus brightness, contrast, color
(saturation), tint (colour hue) and sharpness you may adjust the parameters in a range from 0 to 100%.
The default is 50%.
The Sub-menu scaling enables the selection between several default aspect ratios: 1 = 1:1.333,
2 = 1:1.777
picture advanced utilities options gamma linear crt color temp 5000 7300 9300 user user red – + user green – + user blue – +
In the advanced menu:
The Sub-menu gamma allows following adjustments:
In selecting linear, the rendition of the video picture will maintain the characteristics of the signal delivered by the Video Assist. The displayed option crt is not valid for this monitor.
The Sub-menu color temp enables the following adjustments: By selecting 5000, the whites will look
“warmer” than by selecting a higher colour temperature. When user is selected in the color temp Submenu, the amount of each primary colour can be set in a range from 0 to 100%.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
215
picture advanced utilities options osd timeout 35 seconds osd background opaque translucent test pattern off color bars factory reset press <+> to select power on time 75:39 backlight on time
GUL C14G04V7 ROM: C14F03V1
In the utilities menu
After the last change, the OSD will stay visible for the duration preset here. After the OSD times out, all changes will automatically be saved.
Depending on the osd background setting, the data will appear in a box or on the video image.
The Sub-menu test pattern switches on color bars to calibrate the On Board Monitor.
By pressing “+” all settings will be replaced by factory default values.
In the Sub-menus power on time and backlight on
time as well as in the last Sub-menu line, information for the Maintenance Personnel will be displayed.
picture advanced utilities options osd osd h pos 50 – + osd v pos 48 – + language backlight 98 – + dpms on off blank color red green blue black
In the option menu
Select the position of the OSD by activating one of the icons.
The horizontal and vertical position of the OSD can
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
216
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
be precisely adjusted by means of these two settings.
Select the language of the OSD: either english or german.
Set the intensity of the screen backlight.
Sub-menu dpms is reserved for ARRICAM Maintenance Personnel.
Select the colour of the screen when no video signal is supplied to the On Board Monitor.
Caution!
The default setting of the backlight is 50%.
By increasing this setting, the video image will appear brighter but the power consumption will increase. Therefore you should first adjust the brightness of the image before altering the
backlight setting.
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
217
5 – THE VIDEO ASSIST SYSTEM COMPONENTS
218
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
THE LENS DATA DISPLAY
The LDD Screen – feet and inches The LDD Screen – metric camera is stand by camera is inching camera is stand by – Lens Data System not initiated camera is not ready camera is running camera is stand by – focus marks setting
THE LENS DATA DISPLAY
The LDD-FP Lens/Status Screen – feet and inches camera is stand by camera is inching
The LDD-FP Lens/Status Screen – metric no cam status short cam status camera is not ready camera is running long cam status option menu
The Studio Readout
Although the Studio Readout is not a component of the viewfinder system but its mounting is only possible on top of a Studio Viewfinder.
MOUNTING THE STUDIO READOUT
After having removed – by unscrewing one 3 mm hex screw – the cover from the top of the Studio Viewfinder, place the Studio Readout on the Viewfinder and fix it firmly by tightening the screw. By placing the 3 mm metric hex wrench in the access holes, the Studio
Viewfinder can be removed or fixed to the camera without having to remove the Studio Readout first.
Studio Readout
fig.6/1
FUNCTION OF THE STUDIO READOUT
On both sides of the Studio Readout, the FPS display as well as a RUN LED are provided. The FPS displays will either show the actual frame rate or other info – please consult the related list of messages in chapter 1 on page 44 dedicated to the FPS displays.
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
221
Studio Readout
fig.6/2
FPS display
RUN
LED
Camera right side
Lens Data Display connector
RUN LED
FPS display
Accessory shoe bat LED
RAW STOCK button
Film length display
SHUTTER display
Accessory shoe
Camera left side
BRIGHT button
RESET button
THE LEDS
glows green glows red off
RUN LED while the camera is in STAND BY status or when the camera is not powered camera is RUNNING at the preset frame rate camera is RUNNING UP or DOWN, incl. the lap of time used for the In-camera Slate exposing, while the camera is NOT READY
BAT LED while the camera is in STAND BY status or when the camera is not powered when the battery supplies less than e.g. 20.6 V
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
222
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Studio Readout
fig.6/3
Top view
Mounting screw
Accessory shoe
Access holes for Studio
Viewfinder mounting screws
Lens Data Display connector
On the left side only, further displays also show the actual shutter opening angle and the exposed film length.
While the button RAW STOCK is pressed, the amount of raw stock will be displayed instead of the exposed film length. When pushing the RESET button (it has the identical function as the one located on the Camera
Control Panels, except the Studio Standard Panel) for more than three seconds, the exposed film counter will be reset and the display will show
0000
.
By pushing the BRIGHT button the luminosity of all displays will be changed in the following order: dim brightness, medium brightness, maximum brightness.
Notice
The selected brightness level will be memorised in the camera and will be used if, at least, any of the following components is used: the Studio Readout, the Speed Control Box, the Manual Control Box or the Timing Shift Box. If none of these components is used, the brightness of the camera displays will automatically be set on the maximum level.
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
223
The Lens Data System (LDS)
Based on a concept by Fritz Gabriel Bauer, the Lens
Data System was revealed to the industry at the Cinec exhibition 2000. Then it was considered to be an absolute technical novelty in the world of cinematography.
The system is based on the transmission of parameters of the lens to the movie camera and vice versa.
FUNCTIONS OF THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
The main function of the Lens Data System is to show on one of the Lens Data Displays all actual parameters set on the lens as well as on the camera. The Lens Data
Display – Focus Puller (LDD-FP) is smaller then the LDD in size but similar in function. Perfect replicas of the lens barrels – the focal length (fixed or variable), the iris aperture and the focus distance will accurately show the actual settings. Furthermore, not only does the LDS automatically calculate and display the actual depth of field graphically as well as with figures, it also allows the camera assistant to place and store focus marks on the focus scale. In addition to monitoring the lens settings, several camera parameters such as the frame rate, the shutter opening, the amount of exposed film and the raw stock as well as the camera and battery status (RUN, Standby, Voltage, etc.), the LDS will help the focus puller. By means of the buttons located on the left side of the Displays, several functions like setting the unit of measurement (meter/feet) or placing Marks on the focus scale can be done. Last but not least, a new
Focus Tracking option allows the electronic measurement and display focus distances and also remote control the lens motors so the lens will automatically focus on the subject. (See Focus Tracking section at the end of this chapter).
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
224
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Remark: this option is not intended to be an auto-focus and certainly does not replace the traditional focus puller’s job. This option is just a new tool intended to help the professional camera assistant in certain situations.
LDD Screen
fig.6/4
LDD-FP Lens Screen
fig.6/5
LDD-FP Status Screen
fig.6/6
Focus/iris configuration
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
225
The modular Lens Data System is based on various components:
1. LDS Lens
2. Lens Data Box (Studio-LDB, LT-LDB)
3. Lens Data Display (LDD, LDD-FP)
1. LDS Lenses
LDS Lens
fig.6/7
LDS contacts
Some of the most renowned manufacturers, such as
ZEISS and COOKE, produce prime and zoom lenses exclusively for the ARRICAM Cameras which allow electronic transmission of data such as the focal length, the iris aperture, the focus distance as well as other optical characteristics. In the mount of LDS labelled Objectives, a set of contacts is integrated. Because two sets of contacts are provided in the camera lens port, the LDS Lens can be mounted either in the 3 o’clock or 12 o’clock position. This enables the placement of the lens’ index lines in the most convenient position for the camera crew. Suitable contacts are provided in the lens ports of all ARRICAM Cameras as well as in the ARRI 435
Advanced. Currently, the ZEISS Ultra Primes, the ZEISS
Variable Primes and the COOKE S4 Lenses are available with the LDS function. More lenses, e.g. zooms from
COOKE and ANGENIEUX, are in preparation.
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
226
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Notice
In order to protect the LDS Lens mount – especially the sensitive contact pins – always place carefully the adequate cover on the mount, when ever the lens is not on the camera.
2. Lens Data Boxes (Studio & Lite)
The Lens Data Box is the central processing point for the signals from the Lens Control System (LCS) and from the Lens Data System (LDS). Specially designed to fit each ARRICAM body, two Lens Data Boxes are supplied. Different in size and shape but identical in function, both Boxes control lens motors, supply the Lens
Data Display with information and manage the wireless connection to the ARRI LCS components, like the hand units for focus, zoom, iris and camera control. A cable connection to the hand units is possible with the
ARRI WHA-2 & 3. Both ARRI CLM-1 and ARRI CLM-2 motors can be connected to the Lens Data Boxes. The
CLM-1 motor must be linked to the LCS connectors and the CLM-2 motors to the three dedicated connectors labelled FOCUS, IRIS and ZOOM.
Notice
In order to use the In-camera Slate Box (ISB) with the
Lite, the ISB must be fixed to the Lite Lens Data Box.
COMPATIBILITY
The Lens Data Boxes are not only equipped with connectors for using a wired remote control system, but also with a transmitter/receiver (transceiver) which enables wireless remote control function. All remote control units including the Wireless Main Unit (WMU-1) attached
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
227
with either the Wireless Remote Control (WRC-1) or with the Wireless Focus/Iris Control Unit (WFU-1) and/or the Wireless Zoom Control Unit (WZU-1) are compatible with both Lens Data Boxes. The Controlled
Lens Motor (CLM-1 and CLM-2) but also most of the components of the wired Lens Control System (LCS) are also compatible.
Caution!
• Because only one WHA-2 can be connected by cable to the Lens Data Box the simultaneous use of a second WHA-2 must be performed either wireless or via a cable connected to the
Camera Accessory Connector (CAC).
• The ARRI LCS component Focus Iris Unit (FIU-1) is not compatible with the ARRICAM Lens Data
System.
Studio-Lens Data Box
fig.6/8
Removable antenna
LDS ready LED
UNLOCK
Radio channel selector
Radio transmission LED
Motor control LEDs
LCS connectors
Lens motor direction selectors
CLM-2 lens motor connectors
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
228
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Lite - Lens Data Box
fig.6/9
Removable antenna
Radio channel selector
LDS ready LED
LCS connectors
CLM-2 lens motor connectors
Radio transmission
LED
Motor control
LEDs
Lens motor direction selectors
LDB mounting screw
ISB cover mounting screw
MOUNTING OF THE LENS DATA BOXES
Please note that the multiple-pin connectors on both Lens
Data Boxes are mounted freely in order to facilitate the connection to the cameras.
Caution!
Like all other electronic components, be sure that the camera MAIN switch is OFF before connecting the Lens Data Box.
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
229
MOUNTING OF THE STUDIO LENS DATA BOX
To mount the Studio Lens Data B on the ARRICAM Studio, you have first to remove the protecting cover. To do this, push the release knob and slide the cover towards the front of the camera to remove it. Place the Studio
Lens Data Box on the guiding assembly and slide it back until it sits firmly.
Studio Lens Data Box mounting
fig.6/10
➔
1.
➡ ➡ 2.
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
230
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
STUDIO LENS DATA BOX ADAPTER
Under some circumstances, it is preferable to mount the
Studio Lens Data Box away from the Studio body. The
Studio Lens Data Box Adapter enables its mounting on a support system like Sachtler Artemis or Steadicam.
The adapter consists of two mounting plates and a
1 m/3 ft Cable. The Studio Lens Data Box Camera
Plate slides onto the camera instead of the Studio Lens
Data Box itself. The Studio Lens Data Box Adapter Plate is connected to the Studio Lens Data Box. The cable connects the two Plates. An ARRI Dovetail Shoe can be attached to one of the three 3/8” threaded holes of the Studio Lens Data Box Adapter Plate – see chapter 9
– supports, page 351.
Studio Lens Data Box Adapter
fig.6/11
Studio Lens Data Box
Adapter Plate
Studio Lens
Data Box
Camera Plate
Cable
KC-75-S
(1 m/3 ft)
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
231
MOUNTING OF THE LITE LENS DATA BOX
Lite Lens Data Box mounting
fig.6/12
Lens Data Box cover
Connectors
Mounting screw
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
232
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
In order to mount the Lite Lens Data Box on the
ARRICAM Lite, first remove the Lens Data Box Cover from the camera right side with a 3mm metric hex wrench. Now carefully place the Lite Lens Data Box on the camera, and fasten it with the mounting screw.
CONNECTORS AND CONTROL LEDS
Besides the connectors that connect with the camera both Lens Data Boxes are equipped with three sockets solely dedicated to the connection of CLM-2 motors.
Caution!
Only ARRI CLM-2 motors can be plugged in these three connectors.
Beside these three sockets, there are two connectors labelled LCS allow the connection of the CLM-1lens motors. Also one Wired Handgrip Attachment WHA-2 can be connected there via the Cables LC-M1-SP-S or LC-Z1-S.
Lens Data Box with WHA 2
fig.6/13
LCS connectors
Focus/iris control WFU-1
Studio
Lens Data
Box
WHA-2 connector
CLM-2 connectors
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
233
CONNECTING WIRELESS CONTOL DEVICES
In order for correct wireless operation, please note that an antenna must be installed on both transmission devices, before activating them in the following order:
1. On the Lens Data Box: set the RF CHANNEL selector to the desired channel.
2. On the camera: set the MAIN switch to ON
3. If a Lens Data Display is installed: push the ON/OFF button to activate the Display
4. Now, the RF LED on the Lens Data Box will alternately blink red/green until the transceiver initialization is done. As soon as the LED blinks green, the LDB is ready for communication.
5. ONLY NOW, should the WMU-1 handset be turned
ON.
On the Lite Lens Data Box only there is a connector for the In-camera Slate Box (ISB). It should always be protected by the cover when the ISB is not mounted.
THE LEDS
= LED glows red = LED glows green
= LED blinks red = LED blinks green
= LED blinks fast red = LED blinks alternately
= is off (grey) red/green
Ready LED
Indicates that a LDS Lens has been detected and the data communication is working well.
Indicates that the LDS Lens has been recognised
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
234
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
but there is a problem. To locate the problem, check the system with another lens.
Focus, Zoom, Iris LEDs
Indicates that lens motor control is ready.
Indicates that one of the limits of the barrel has been reached, e.g. iris barrel is at T 22 or the focus barrel has reached infinity.
Rf LED (radio transmission)
The RF CHANNEL selector is set to position “9” which means that the transceiver is switched OFF
(or the camera is not powered).
Shows the initialization of the transceiver
The transceiver is ready
As soon as a remote control unit, e.g. ARRI
WMU-1 is ON, the RF LED shows that the radio connection is working correctly.
When the RF selector has been changed while the camera is powered
Indicates that radio transmission is not operational
Indicates that RF signal interference has disturbed the correct functioning of the LDB transceiver, e.g. another Lens Data Box or Universal Motor Controller (UMC) is set to the same channel.
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
235
Caution!
The rf channel should ideally be selected on the
Lens Data Box before the camera is powered
ON. Slowly turning the RF CHANNEL selector while the camera is powered will cause a problem and the RF LED will light up red. In this case, switch the transceiver OFF (turn the selector quickly to “9”), then – after about 3 sec. – quickly turn the selector to the desired channel.
Notice
• This warning will not appear when two WMUs are connected wirelessly to the Lens Data Box
(same channel) in order to separately control e.g. the zoom and the focus.
• On the WMU-1, the LED will light up red when an unsuitable channel has been set with the RF
CHANNEL selector.
RF Channel selector
Set the RF CHANNEL selector to the same channel as that on the Wireless Main Unit (WMU). To do so, first set it to position “9” (radio power OFF), then to the desired channel. The following list indicates which channels are legal in the various countries.
0, 1, USA, Canada, Mexico, New Zealand,
Europe except France and Spain
2 Europe except Spain
3 USA, Canada, Mexico, New Zealand,
France
4 Japan
5, 6 Australia
7 Spain
9 radio power OFF
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
236
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
If no wireless lens control is used, set the RF CHANNEL selector on the Lens Data Box to “9”. This will turn the transceiver OFF and save power.
CONNECTING LENS MOTORS TO THE LENS DATA
BOXES
Notice
As usually recommended when installing or removing electrical devices, turn the camera MAIN switch OFF before connecting or disconnecting motors and/or remote controls to/from the Lens Data Boxes.
The combined use of both types of ARRI CLM motors is possible.
ARRI CLM-1 MOTORS
Daisy chain CLM-1 motors together and connect the last in line to one of the LCS connectors on the Lens Data
Box. If a CLM-1 motor is to the left of the lens, set the
DIRECTION switch on the motor to L. If it is to the right, set the DIRECTION switch to R.
ARRI CLM-2 MOTORS
Connect CLM-2 motors to the FOCUS, ZOOM and IRIS connectors on the Lens Data Box. If a CLM-2 motor is to the left of the lens, set the DIRECTION switch on the
Lens Data Box to L. If it is to the right, set the DIREC-
TION switch to R.
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
237
3. Lens Data Displays (LDD and LDD-FP)
Built into weatherproof housings, the TFT screens of the
Lens Data Displays offer a brilliant and sharp picture as long as the ambient temperature remains between -10° to + 40° C/14° to 104° F. You can choose between two different Lens Data Displays: the Lens Data Display
(LDD) and the Lens Data Display – Focus Puller (LDD-FP).
Even though there is a difference in size and design, both offer the same functionalities.
Caution!
It is not possible to connect and use two Lens
Data Displays simultaneously on one camera and/or on its accessories.
The LDD has a large TFT screen that shows several sorts of information simultaneously. By switching between the Lens Screen and the Status Screen, you will get the same information from the smaller LDD-FP.
MOUNTING THE LENS DATA DISPLAYS ON THE
STUDIO AND LITE
Both Lens Data Displays can be mounted on any Accessory shoe, such as on the Studio Readout or Lite Mask
Frameglow.
A mobile arm is part of the LDD.
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
238
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Lens Data Display mounting
fig.6/14
Lite Mask
Frameglow
Studio Readout
A Backplate together with the Shoe Post allows the LDD-
FP Holder to be mounted on any Accessory shoe. A collapsible Sunshade attaches by means of Velcro.
LDD-FP with Holder
fig.6/15
Release button
Back plate
Backplate holder
Mobile shoe post
Tension control
Tightening screw
Accessory shoe
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
239
Fasten the LDD-FP by pressing it towards the Backplate.
By pushing the release button on top of the Backplate, the LDD-FP can be removed from the Holder.
Because of its size, the LDD-FP can easily be mounted at the most convenient place for optimum visibility, e.g. on the Matte Box. Therefore, ARRI provides different
“L-Brackets” complete with an Accessory shoe that enables mounting on the MB-14, 16, 18 and 19. These “L-
Brackets” are fixed on the Matte Box Side Flap Holder.
If a Side Flap is used in addition, a small clip needs to be attached on the Flap to prevent the L-Bracket from rotating.
L-Bracket mounting
fig.6/16
L-bracket
➡
➡
Clip
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
240
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
CONNECTING THE LENS DATA DISPLAYS
The LDD and LDD-FP can be connected to the cameras in different ways. It is possible to connect the Displays to the dedicated LDD connectors on the Studio Readout, on the Lite Mask Frameglow and on the Remote Control
Station (RCS).
With other cables, both Displays can also be connected to the Camera Accessory Connector CAC and to the
Speed Control Box Accessory Connector SAC. Therefore, different cables – each one transmitting power and signal – are provided.
Caution!
When using a cable longer than 3 m/10 ft to connect the Displays to a CAC or SAC, the short
Compensation Cable KC 77-S must be added in order to obtain the correct termination.
Please note that no cable connection (e.g. Cable
Drum + Cable) should be longer than 53 m/175 ft in length.
On the LDD, connectors labelled LDD and LCS enable versatile connections.
On the LDD-FP, the smaller LDD-FP-connector located on the right side enables a variety of connections by using other cables. The second connector on the rear side of the LDD-FP is for future applications unavailable at the time of writing.
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
241
LDD connections
fig.6/17
LDD connector
KC 60-Sp-S
KC 79-S
LDD
Lite Mask-
Frameglow
LDD
Studio Readout
LDD
Remote
Control
Station RCS
LDD-FP connections
fig.6/18
LDD-FP connector
K LDD-FP-RDO
LDD Lite Mask
Frameglow
LDD
Studio Readout
LDD
Remote
Control
Station RCS
Studio & Lite
Lens Data Box
LDDFP-LCS 600
LDDFP-LCS 1000
LDDFP-LCS 3000
LCS
LCS connector
KC 76-S
Speed Control
Box SCB
SAC
Manual Control
Box & MCB Cable
Adapter
SAC
Timing Shift Box
& MCB Cable
Adapter
SAC
CAC
STUDIO/LITE
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
242
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Power/Sleep button (LDD) – ON/OFF switch (LLD-FP)
To power the LDD, briefly push the POWER/SLEEP button.
On the LDD only, the SLEEP status can be activated by briefly pushing the POWER/SLEEP button.
To power up the LDD-FP, set the switch to ON.
The SLEEP status is indicated on both Displays by a slowly blinking LED.
To turn both Devices OFF, push the POWER/SLEEP button for about 3 seconds or put the LDD-FP switch to OFF.
Power/Sleep LED
The LED is OFF when the Displays and/or the camera are not powered.
Glows green when the Displays are ON.
Blinks slowly green when the Displays are in SLEEP status
Glows red indicates that the Displays are ON but that a problem occurs.
Notice
In case a problem occurs, turn the Display OFF; set the camera MAIN switch to OFF and start again after about 5 sec. If the problem persists, ask your
ARRICAM Maintenance Centre.
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
243
THE CONTROLS OF THE LENS DATA DISPLAYS
LDD
fig.6/19
POWER/SLEEP
SET
UP
DOWN
DELETE
ON/SLEEP/OFF
SET
UP
DOWN
DELETE
Power/sleep LED
LDD-FP
fig.6/20
Power/sleep LED
ON/OFF
Unit of measurement
SET
UP
DOWN
DELETE
MENU
LDD-FP connector
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
244
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Set button
On both Displays, pushing the SET button will insert
Marks on the focus scale.
On the LDD-FP, selects options when the Main Menu is activated.
Up button
On both Displays, increases the numbering of the Focus
Mark when it lines up with the index.
On the LDD-FP, steps forwards through options when the
Main Menu is activated.
Down button
On both Displays, decreases the numbering of the
Focus Mark when it lines up with the index.
On the LDD-FP, steps backwards through options when the Main Menu is activated.
Delete button
On both Displays, pushing the DELETE button briefly, a Focus Mark next to the index will be deleted. When pushed for 3 sec. at least, all Marks will be deleted.
ON THE LDD-FP ONLY
Unit of measurement selector
Select the unit of measurement between M (meter),
LENS (same unit as engraved on the focus ring) and FT
(feet). The change affects the focus scale numbers, the depth of field information, the hyperfocal distance and the close focus indication.
Notice
To change the unit of measurement on the LDD, the
UP and DOWN buttons will be used – see page
250.
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
245
Menu button
When the LDD-FP is powered up, briefly pushing the
MENU button will switch from one Screen to another one. To switch between a Sub-menu and the Main
Menu, push for at least 3 sec. the MENU button.
FUNCTION OF THE LENS DATA DISPLAYS
Preliminary remark
Although there are some differences in design, the handling of the LDD and LDD-FP is quite similar. The main difference is in the kind of data displayed.
On the larger LDD Screen all data is shown at once.
To see the same data on the smaller LDD-FP, toggle between two complementary Screens. This allows the user to configure the Screens accordingly to his/her needs.
Caution!
The Lens Data Displays are only operational in combination with a Lens Data Box mounted on a powered camera.
In order to save power, both Screens automatically go into sleep mode – the LDD after about 5 min. and the smaller LDD-FP after about 2 min. – if no display relevant parameters are changed. As soon as a camera parameter or a lens setting has been altered as well as when a message appears (e.g. low battery), the
Screens wake up automatically.
Only if an LDS Lens is mounted on the camera, are the lens parameters displayed. If no LDS Lens is used, the message
No lens detected
lights up but the relevant camera parameters will still be shown. If an LDS Prime Lens is detected, its focal length will immediately be displayed
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
246
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
and arrows appear on the screen. After initialization, the lens scales appear and the depth of field will be displayed graphically as well as numerically.
Start-up
When a Lens Data Display is powered up and it detects an LDS Lens, the lens rings need to be rotated so the
Lens Data System can recognize the lens ring positions.
When ARRI CLM motors are used, this will happen automatically during the calibration procedure. If no CLM motors are used, this can be done simply by turning the rings by hand. Rotate each barrel slowly until the arrows on the Screen fade out and the scales appear.
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
247
The LDD Display
As soon as the LDD is switched ON, and during the automatic set up of the LDS functions, information about the installed software will appear for a few seconds. It is recommended to note the LDS software version for the
ARRICAM Maintenance Technician in case of inquiries.
As soon as the set up is completed, the screen shows two windows.
LDD Screen
fig.6/21
Left window:
Lens status
Right window:
Camera status
Focus mark
Hyperfocal distance line
Message area
LDS info area
Camera info area
Focus index line
Depth of field bar
Focus scale
Zoom scale/ focal box
Focal/ iris index line
Iris scale
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
248
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
The left window mimics the three scales on lens barrels: focus, zoom and iris. They have the same numbers, the same divisions and sub-divisions. If an LDS Prime Lens is used, the focal length is displayed in a little box instead of a scale. Each LDS Lens contains a depth of field table which enables the Lens Data Box to visualize the depth of field on a Lens Data Display and/or video monitors.
On the Lens Data Displays, a yellow bar will simulate the depth of field while figures on its top and bottom show the boundaries. If the yellow depth of field area reaches the edges of the screen, the near and far distances will continue to update. Facing the focus index line, the actual focus setting is shown in meters and centimeters or feet and inches.
The right window shows camera and lens status. Furthermore, messages and warnings will appear if they are generated. As well as the actual text information, the background colour will also alter; this allows camera status changes to be seen from a distance.
Background colour Camera Info Area
Gray Standby
Orange INCHING
RUNNING UP
RUNNING DOWN
Green RUN
RAMPING
Red RUN ASYNC
NOT READY
Background colour Message Area
Red Wrong operation
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
249
UNIT OF MEASUREMENT
The Lens Data Displays will automatically show the same unit of measurement as that used by the lens.
On the LDD only, this can be overridden as follows:
• To display all values in feet, hold the DOWN button while powering up the Lens Data Display.
• To display all values in meters, hold the UP button while powering up the Lens Data Display.
The selected unit of measurement will be used until the
Lens Data Display is powered down. If it is desired, the
ARRICAM Maintenance Centre can define that your
LDD permanently shows one of the units of measurement.
On the LDD-FP, the UNIT selector located on the left side enables the choice of the unit – see fig. 6/20.
THE HYPERFOCAL DISTANCE LINE
When the hyperfocal distance line faces the focus index, everything from half the hyperfocal distance to infinity appears sharp. The Lens Data System automatically calculates the hyperfocal distance depending on the focal length, the iris aperture and the selected circle of confusion.
A small grey line on the focus scale as well as a figure in the LDS Info Area indicate the hyperfocal distance.
LDD Screen
fig.6/22 hyperfocal distance line
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
250
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
CIRCLE OF CONFUSION
The circle of confusion (coc), used for the calculation of the depth of field and the hyperfocal distance, can be selected on both Lens Data Displays.
Option switches located behind the coverplate at the rear of the LDD enable the selection between four options. The default setting used to display the depth of field is 0.025 mm / 1/1000”.
Notice
We recommend you ask a ARRICAM Maintenance
Centre for setting your coc preference.
LDD-label circle of confusion
fig.6/23
To select a circle of confusion:
1. Remove the LDD from the camera and lay it screen downwards on a clean place.
2. Open the LDD by unscrewing the four Phillips screws with a PZ-0 or PH-0 screwdriver.
On the top right corner, next to the POWER/SLEEP button, two rows of Option switches are located.
The upper row labelled S2 contains four switches relevant for selecting the coc.
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
251
3. Set the dedicated Option switch to ON.
Caution!
• Only one of the Option switches should be set to ON. If none or more than one switch is set to
ON, the LDD automatically will use the default setting.
• The lower row labelled S1 is dedicated for the
ARRICAM Maintenance Personnel only, do not touch it!
The right window is divided into three areas: Camera
Info, LDS Info and Message.
The unit of measurement used in the film length display is established by the magazine setting.
CAMERA INFO AREA
LDD Screen – Camera Info Area
fig.6/24 camera status
(green background colour) reverse indicator/actual frame rate actual shutter/controlling device exposed film length
Camera Status
On top of the right window, the actual mode will be displayed: Standby, RUNNING, INCHING or NOT
READY.
Fps
The fps display always shows the actual frame rate of the camera. So in Standby, the fps value shows
0.000
. During RUN UP, RUN, RUN RAMP or RUN DOWN, the current camera frame rate is displayed.
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
252
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Fps Reverse Indicator
When the camera is set to RUN REVERSE,
R
will precede the frame rate.
Shutter
The current shutter angle opening is always displayed.
Next to the figure, a single letter will indicate the item which controls the shutter opening – see table below.
Exp.
The length of exposed film will be displayed here.
LDD Screen – Camera Info Area
fig.6/25 preset frame rate/controlling device actual battery voltage unexposed film length exposed film length of the last take
Set Fps
Not only the preset frame rate but also the device which controls the camera is indicated.
Table of abbreviation:
(no letter) the frame rate has been preset on the
Camera Control Panel.
S Speed Control Box (SCB)
M Manual Control Box (MCB)
Y External Sync signal processed by SCB
T External Sync signal (time-code) processed by the
In-camera Slate Box (ISB)
V External Sync signal processed by the Video
Assist (IVS)
W Wireless Remote Control (WRC)
C ARRIMOTION Camera Control Box (CCB)
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
253
Battery
The actual voltage of the supplied power is indicated.
If the battery voltage drops to the battery warning level, the battery warning and the battery value (e.g. 20.6
V) will flash. If the power level drops below the point where the camera can RUN, the battery warning will remain flashing, and the camera will go into NOT
READY status; simultaneously the background will go red.
Next to the voltage figure, the letter N or U will show if the 24 volt NiCad (N) or the User (U – Lithium-Ion or other battery type) warning level has been activated.
RawStk
The magazine counter is displayed here. If no magazine is attached,
0 m
or
0 ft
will be displayed. If the value reaches the warning level, the label RawStk and the raw stock length will flash. If there is a roll-out, the line will remain flashing, and the camera will go into
NOT READY status – simultaneously the background will go red.
Take
The length of the film exposed between the last start and stop will be displayed here.
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
254
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
LENS DATA SYSTEM (LDS) INFO AREA
LDD Screen – LDS Info Area
fig.6/26 lens type/focal length/widest T stop actual hyperfocal distance shortest possible focus setting
Lens Type
The brand name (e.g. Zeiss), the type identification
(e.g.Ultra Prime), the actual focal length and the widest
T stop are shown in this line.
Hyperfocal Distance
For prime lenses: hyperfocal distance is shown and changes dynamically as the iris setting changes.
For zoom lenses: hyperfocal distance is shown and changes dynamically as iris and/or zoom setting changes.
Close Focus
The closest possible focus setting with this lens is shown.
MESSAGE AREA
LDD Screen – Message Area
fig.6/27
Messages
Alert (red background colour)
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
255
The Message Area provides more detailed information about the camera and LDS status. It displays status messages as well as alerts.
Status Messages
Status messages contain information about the camera’s status. These messages are short and will be displayed while the respective camera status persists. If a new message appears, it will be added to the existing ones.
Among others, the following messages can appear:
Buckle Trip A buckle trip has been tripped
Filter in the Gate A filter is installed in the Aperture
Plate
Film Jam A film jam has occurred in camera or magazine
Movement Open Movement is not locked in the front position
Roll Out Camera stops before film end passes the gate, Dust Check ans
PHASE are still possible
No Reverse Preset fps is higher then 32 or
Lite Magazine is mounted
Illegal Fps More then 40 (LITE) or 60 (STUDIO) fps has been set
Mag takes up Magazine is taking up loose film – film camera NOT READY
Film End < 6 m According to magazine counter –
/< 20 ft end of film warning
Heater Heater is activated – camera is
NOT READY
Dust Check The shutter is out of the viewing path
Adapter Cover Warning! camera is STANDBY but magazine adapter cover is missing!
Low Battery Change battery as soon as possible
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
256
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Alert
An alert is displayed when an error occurs while handling the camera or an accessory; e.g. incorrect setting of parameters. When an alert appears all status messages disappear as long as the alert is displayed.
During an alert, the background of the Message Area turns red, see the troubleshooting list in the chapter
12 –.Appendix.
Magazine Error Use another magazine
Mag take up Reload magazine side runs free
Cannot set more Delete a Focus Mark to set a new than 9 Marks one.
Push UP or Deleting a Focus Mark
DOWN to select,
DELETE to delete
Push SET to select, Renumbering a Focus Mark then UP/DOWN to renumber
Push UP or
DOWN to select, then hold SET to
Moving a Focus Mark remember
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
257
The LDD-FP Display
After the LDD-FP is powered on, the initialisation starts while the software version and some preset data are shown. When this procedure is completed, the Lens
Screen will appear.
The layout and the colour code of the LDD-FP Lens Screen is similar to that of the LDD. Therefore only the differences will be described here. Because of the limited space, only two of the three lens scales can be shown at any one time and are selected by means of the screen option menu. The yellow depth of field bar will only be displayed in combination with the focus scale in the left window. The middle of the right window shows the focus setting with the near and far boundaries of the depth of field. The iris aperture and the focal length are always displayed at the bottom of right window while camera status information can be added or removed on its top.
A small difference in monitoring which device controls the frame rate and shutter opening on the camera, exists: while the LDD uses only a single letter at the end of the particular line, the LDD-FP does the same on the
Lens Screen but on the Status Screen shows a 3 or 4 letter acronym in addition.
Lens- Status- Screen (remote) control device
(no letter) preset by Camera Control Panel.
S (SCB) Speed Control Box (SCB)
M (MCB) Manual Control Box (MCB)
Y (SYN) External Sync signal processed by (SCB)
T (TcSy) External Sync signal (time-code) processed by the In-camera Slate Box (ISB)
V (ViSy) External Sync signal processed by the
Video Assist (IVS)
W (WRC) Wireless Remote Control (WRC)
C (CCB) ARRIMOTION Camera Control Box (CCB)
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
258
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Furthermore, the Status Screen can be selected to show the LDS and camera parameters as are displayed on the right window of the LDD.
LDD-FP Status Screen LDD-FP Lens Screen
fig.6/28 left window lens status right window camera status focus mark hyperfocal distance line focus/iris configuration message area
LDS info area camera info area focus
/iris index line depth of field bar focus scale iris scale actual focus/depth of field (numerical) area message area actual focal/actual iris area
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
259
The Main Menu
To enter the Main Menu, push the MENU button for at least 3 sec.
To select a Sub-menu or an option, move the cursor by pushing the UP and DOWN buttons.
To confirm an option, press the SET button.
Depending of the next desired operation, use one of the two options to leave a Menu:
• To return directly to the Lens Screen, push the MENU button for at least 3 sec.
• By pushing either the SET or MENU buttons briefly, the Main Menu will appear.
The Sub-menu Brightness
When pushing the MENU button for at least 3 sec, the Main Menu will appear with the first Sub-menu
BRIGHTNESS highlighted.
LDD-FP Main Menu – Sub-menu Brightness
fig.6/29
By briefly pushing the SET button, the Brightness Screen will appear. By using the UP and DOWN buttons, the brightness can be adjusted. When leaving the Submenu, the new adjustment will be saved.
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
260
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
The Sub-menu Lens Screen
When the Main Menu is shown, the highlighted cursor can be moved to the Sub-menu Lens Screen. By briefly pushing the SET button, the Lens Screen will appear.
LDD-FP Main Menu – Sub-menu Lens Screen
fig.6/30
The upper part enables the selection of one or two of the three lens scales - Focus, Iris and Focal length/Zoom
– to be displayed. A warning will remind you that only two of the three options can be selected at once.
Option 1st Scale 2nd Scale Yellow Bar
1 focus depth of field
2 focal/zoom
3 iris
4 focus focal/zoom depth of field
5 focus iris depth of field
6 focal/zoom iris
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
261
In the lower part, only one option can be selected.
LDD-FP Lens Screen – Camera Info Area
fig.6/31 no cam status short cam status long cam status
To save the selected option, push the SET button.
By briefly pushing the MENU button or after having moved the cursor to Done and pushed the SET button, you will not only save the selected options, but also reach the Main Menu.
The Sub-menu Circle Of Confusion (coc)
LDD-FP Main Menu – Sub-menu Circle of Confusion
fig.6/32
After having selected the Sub-menu circle of confusion, the coc screen will offer three options. To select the appropriate option, move the cursor on it and push the
SET button. Then move the cursor to Done and press
SET to return to the Main Menu. When pushing the
MENU button for 3 sec. the Lens Screen will appear.
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
262
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
The Sub-menu Help
When selected the Sub-menu Help, a screen of information will be displayed. Depending on the active Submenu, pushing the SET button while the cursor marks the question mark will open useful dedicated advice.
LDD-FP Main Menu – Sub-menu Help e.g. Lens Screen
fig.6/33
MARKING THE FOCUS SCALE ON BOTH LENS DATA
DISPLAYS
Similar to the regular way of putting Focus Marks on the lens or remote control scale, the focus puller can place, move, renumber or erase Marks on the “electronic” focus scale. Up to nine differently coloured Marks can be set on the focus scale. The Displays store Marks and remember them when power is OFF. The Displays also keep Focus Marks when a new lens is attached to the camera - Marks that are out of the range of the new lens are not displayed, but still stored. The only way to remove Focus Marks is to delete them manually.
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
263
Focus Mark – examples
fig.6/34 index line single mark solid frame (yellow) first mark dotted frame (yellow) second mark
The Display’s Focus Marks are square; a number and a colour will automatically be assigned. If a Focus Mark must be identified for moving or renumbering purposes, a solid or dotted yellow frame will surround this selected
Mark.
Setting a Mark
By means of four buttons, located on the left side of both
Displays, the “handling” of Focus Marks on the Focus
Scale can be achieved.
Marks can be set at any time.
1. Turn the lens focus ring so the index line points to the position where you want the Mark.
2. Push the SET button marked
.
A Mark appears that has a number which is one unit higher than the highest Mark number present on the scale. For example, if the focus scale already has Marks numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4, the new mark will be number
5. If the highest number is 9, any unused numbers will be used.
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
264
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Notice
If nine Marks are already set, pushing the
SET button will not set any new Marks.
Instead, the Message Area will show the alert:
9 marks are set. Erase an existing one
This will be shown for about 4 sec., or, if the button is pushed for longer than 4 sec., for as long as the
SET button is pushed.
If the index line points to an existing Mark, a new Mark is added next to the existing one.
Deleting one Mark
Marks can be deleted at any time.
1. Turn the lens focus ring so the index line points to the
Mark that should be deleted.
2. Push the DELETE button marked
briefly.
Caution!
If you push the button for more than 3 sec., all Marks will disappear!
If the index line does not point at a Mark and the
DELETE button is pushed, nothing happens. If the index line points to multiple Marks at the same scale position, the DELETE button will not delete any of them at first. Instead, if the DELETE button is pushed, an alert will be displayed in the Message Area:
Push UP/DOWN, DELETE to delete
The first time the UP or the DOWN buttons are pushed, the Mark closest to the index line shows the solid yellow frame. The alert disappears when the solid frame disappears. Each further push of the UP or the DOWN buttons moves the solid frame to another of the Marks that are at the same scale position. Now the DELETE button
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
265
will delete the selected Mark. If the DELETE button is not pushed, the frame disappears after 3 sec.
Deleting all Marks
Push the DELETE button for 3 seconds.
Renumbering a Mark
1. Turn the focus ring until the Mark to renumber aligns with the focus index line.
2. Push the UP/DOWN buttons marked
or .
3. This will cycle through the following numbers:
1, 2, 3, 4, 5 , 6, 7, 8, 9.
Since each number has a colour associated, the colours will also change.
Notice
The Displays will not update existing numbers, so it is possible to get duplicate numbers.
If a Mark is being set to the number that already exists, there will be two Marks with the same number. The Displays will not automatically renumber.
If the index line points to multiple Marks at the same scale position, the UP or the DOWN buttons will not renumber them at first, but instead place a solid frame around the Mark closest to the index line. Then each further UP or DOWN button push will select another one of the Marks that are at the same scale position.
The Message Area will display the following alert:
Push SET to choose, UP/DOWN to renumber
This alert disappears when either the solid or the dotted frame disappears.
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
266
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Pushing the SET button now will change the solid frame to the dotted frame. Now the UP or the DOWN buttons will renumber the Mark with the dotted frame. If the SET button is not pushed, or the UP or the DOWN buttons are not pushed, the frame disappears after 3 sec. If the
DELETE button is pushed while Mark has either the solid or the dotted frame, that Mark is deleted.
Moving a Mark
1. Turn the focus ring until the Mark to move aligns with the focus index line.
2. Push the SET button and keep it held down.
3. Turn the lens focus ring.
4. Release the SET button.
If the index line points to multiple Marks at the same scale position, pushing and holding the SET button will not allow a Mark to move at first. Instead, an alert will be displayed in the Message area:
Push SET to choose, UP/DOWN to remember
The first time the UP or the DOWN buttons are pushed, the Mark closest to the index line is highlighted. The alert disappears when the solid frame disappears.
FOCUS TRACKING
It is now possible to use a distance measuring device (such as the Cinematography Electronics Cine Tape Measure) to display a pointer on the LDD-FP indicating the distance to the subject. This can be used simply for information purposes or, by pressing and holding the FOCUS button on the WHA-3, the motor on the focus axis will drive the focus ring to automatically track the subject. There is also a new line on the focus scale of the LDD-FP indicating the position of the focus handwheel of the WFU-1. By matching these two indicators, the ‘handover’ from manual to automatic focus will be smooth.
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
267
Operation
In the LDD-FP main menu the entry called FOCUS
TRACKING turns on and off the function of the Focus-
Button, which is attached to the side of the WHA-3.
With this option OFF, the Tape Measure Mark is still displayed but the Focus Motor will not track it.
The Slow, Medium and Fast options determine how fast the Focus Motor responds to the changing distance information.
Compatibility
The following items are needed for Focus Tracking:
Studio or Lite with Lens Data Box, CLM-1 or CLM-2 lens motor, LDS lens, LDD-FP, Cine Tape Measure (or other distance measuring device with industry standard output), WHA-3, CAC to CTM cable.
Tape Measure
Mark
Focus Handwheel
Mark
6 – THE STUDIO READOUT, THE LENS DATA SYSTEM
268
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
THE MANUAL CONTROL BOX, THE SPEED CONTROL BOX, THE TIMING SHIFT BOX
The Camera Control Boxes
Introduction
With the Camera Control Panel on the left side of the camera bodies, the full range of fps as well as the most usual shutter openings can be set. To extend the possibilities of the ARRICAM System, three compatible components have been created specially for the ARRICAM
Cameras. The Manual Control Box (MCB), the Speed
Control Box (SCB) and the Timing Shift Box (TSB) can be used independently or in combination, depending on the required task. While the boxes can be attached directly to the Studio body, cable connection is necessary to use them with the Lite. In addition to the Boxes,
ARRI offers two remote adapters to help you to configure the equipment in the most convenient way.
The Manual Control Box allows – by means of a handwheel – the control of either the shutter opening or the frame rate. Being used together with the Speed
Control Box, it allows the manual control of changes, e.g. speed RAMPING, expanding/reducing the depth of field or a motion blur while maintaining the option of automatic exposure compensation.
The Speed Control Box allows the control of the RUN-
NING direction and the setting of accurate frame rates as well as the change between two preset fps in a preset time. If required, the exposure is automatically compensated during changes of the frame rate with the shutter opening or the iris aperture.
The SCB also allows the synchronization of the
ARRICAM Studio and Lite with several external signals.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
271
AUTOMATIC EXPOSURE COMPENSATION
When the frame rate is altered the exposure time will change. In order to maintain a constant exposure, the
Speed Control Box allows, by changing the shutter opening, the automatic comensation of the exposure time while the frame rate changes – this is called shutter
compensation. If the iris is controlled by a lens motor connected to the Lens Data Box (LDB), an iris compensa-
tion can be controlled by the Speed Control Box.
• If IRIS COMPENSATION is selected, you may enter the fps values in accordance with the amount of iris stops available on the lens, e.g. 6 stops (T 2 to T
16) will allow changes in the range 60 fps to
1 fps (actually, fractionally under 6 stops).
• If the SHUTTER COMPENSATION is selected, you may enter the fps values in accordance with the possibility of the shutter which is a range of 4 stops
(11.25° to 180°). So you may choose for example a change from 2 fps to 32 fps.
Notice
Actually, the automatic iris compensation with the
MCB and SCB is only possible with LDS Lenses. If no LDS Lens is used, the ARRI Wireless Remote Control will allow the iris control and so the automatic exposure compensation with the ARRICAM Cameras.
STROBOSCOPY, MOTION BLUR AND DEPTH OF FIELD
By altering the shutter opening, the exposure time will change. Depending on the frame rate, the following exposure times will result from changing the shutter opening:
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
272
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
<
3 fps 6 fps 12 fps 24 fps 48 fps
180° 1/6 1/12 1/24 1/48 1/96
90° 1/12 1/24 1/48 1/96 1/192
45° 1/24 1/48 1/96 1/192 1/384
22.5° 1/48 1/96 1/192 1/384 1/768
11.25° 1/96 1/192 1/384 1/768 1/1.536
The exposure time will effect the sharpness of either moving objects or the whole frame when the camera is moving.
Short exposure time will increase the sharpness or reduce the motion blur. Therefore, in moving the camera while the shutter angle is small, a stroboscopic effect can appear. This can cause an unpleasant result or an intended effect.
By altering the iris aperture, the depth of field (DoF) will change.
So for example, while setting an LDS Ultra Prime 40 mm
Lens to 3 m/10 feet, the depth of field will be at
F 2.0 about 0.55 m/1.10” near: 2.75 m/9’ far: 3.30 m/10’ 10”
and at
F 16 about 9.60 m/31.6’ near: 1.70 m/5’ 7” far: 11.30 m/37’ 1”
depending on the circle of confusion 0.025 mm/
1/1000”.
An iris versus shutter compensation is only possible within a range of 4 stops, so for example
1st stop
2nd stop
3rd stop
4th stop
<
)
T
{
{
11.25° 2.8
22.5° 4
45° 5.6
{
{
90° 8
180° 11
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
273
By changing the shutter opening and compensating the exposure by altering the iris opening (or vice versa) the changes will not only affect the motion blur but also the depth of field. So either a strobe effect or a ”focus ramp” can be achieved with the Speed Control Box in combination with the Manual Control Box.
The Manual Control Box (MCB)
MOUNTING AND CONNECTING THE MCB
To mount this box on the ARRICAM Studio, first turn the camera MAIN switch OFF and then use a 3 mm metric hex wrench to remove the small cover on the rear of the camera body. After checking that both connectors are clean, attach the Manual Control Box by engaging the two pins in the gauged holes and then by tightening the two mounting screws.
Studio – MCB mounting
fig.7/1
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
274
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
mcu
Notice
If no Manual Control Box is installed, the protection cover must be fitted on the camera. If you intend to mount the MCB and the Speed Control Box to the
Studio, you must first attach the SCB to the camera. To attach or remove the SCB or the Studio Camera Handle from the Studio, the MCB has to be removed first.
Manual Control Box (MCB)
Dimmer
Display fig.7/2
Handwheel
Function switch
CAC connector
The MCB Cable Adapter
To connect the Manual Control Box to the Lite, first mount the MCB on the MCB Cable Adapter or the
Remote Control Station (RCS) and connect a cable between the adapter and the CAC connector of the camera (also works with the Studio).
MCB + Cable Adapter
fig.7/3
Manual
Control Box
➡ ➡ mcu
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
SAC connetor
MCB cable adapter
275
Studio – MCB remote connection
fig.7/4
SAC cable connections:
KC 65-S (3 m/10 ft) or
KC 69-S (15 m/50 ft)
Lite
CAC
CAC
CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS
MANUAL CONTROL BOX
– – – –
STANDBY
MCB is swiched OFF
MCB is switched OFF
RUNNING
MCB is switched OFF
CCB
STANDBY
Camera Control Box controls the camera
No fps or shutter adjustment is possible with the MCB because the ARRIMOTION CCB/
Jogbox controls the camera for shooting
FORWARD.
– CCB
STANDBY
Camera Control Box controls the camera
No fps or shutter adjustment is possible with the MCB because the ARRIMOTION CCB/
Jogbox controls the camera for shooting REVERSE.
Syn
Speed Control Box controls the camera sync
NOT READY
No adjustment of the fps or shutter is possible with the Manual Control Box because the Speed Control Box controls the camera to RUN FORWARD and the SPEED CON-
TROL switch is set to SYNC.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
276
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
MANUAL CONTROL BOX
– Syn
Speed Control Box controls the camera sync
NOT READY
No adjustment of the fps or shutter is possible with the Manual Control Box because the Speed Control Box controls the camera to RUN REVERSE and the SPEED CONTROL switch is set to SYNC.
TcSy
STANDBY
In-camera Slate Box controls the camera sync
No adjustment of the fps is possible with the
MCB because the In-camera Slate Box controls the camera (time-code).
ViSy
STANDBY
Video Assist controls the camera sync
No adjustment of the fps is possible with the
MCB because Video Assist controls the camera.
WRC
STANDBY
Wireles Remote Control controls the camera
No fps or shutter adjustment is possible with the MCB because the Wireless Remote
Control controls the camera.
– WRC
STANDBY
Wireles Remote Control controls the camera
No REVERSE fps or shutter adjustment is possible with the MCB because the Wireless Remote Control controls the camera.
BRIGHT button
By pushing this button, you will increase or decrease the brightness of all displays. Three steps are cycled through: dim, normal, bright.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
277
Function Switch (MANUAL CONTROL)
By sliding the little switch you will select the function of
<
Handwheel
Depending on the function selected with the MANUAL
CONTROL switch, the handwheel will either allow the adjustment of the shutter opening, the frame rate or the control of the ramping time between the two frame rates preset on the Speed Control Box.
FUNCTIONS AND OPERATIONS OF THE MANUAL
CONTROL BOX
Depending if the MCB is used alone or together with the Speed Control Box, its functions differ slightly.
MCB used alone
Depending on the setting of the MANUAL CONTROL switch on the MCB, the frame rate or the shutter opening can be controlled by TURNING the handwheel. The
MCB allows the change of frame rate using the default ranges 1 to 40 fps (Lite) or 1 to 60 fps (Studio), but without automatic exposure compensation. The actual frame rate is indicated on the MCB display.
More useful is the possibility to control the shutter opening between 0° and 180°. This manual change can occur either when the camera is RUNNING or in the
STANDBY. The actual shutter opening is indicated on the MCB display.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
278
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Notice
• ARRI guarantees the accuracy of the shutter angle between 11.25° and 180°. Please note that even though the display shows 0°, the shutter is not 100% light tight so strong light coming straight into the lens might be photographed.
• If a ramp is controlled by turning fast the handwheel, please be aware that technical boundaries will always define the shortest ramping time
MCB used in combination with the Speed Control Box
As soon as the MCB is switched to FPS and the
REMOTE LED on the Speed Control Box glows green, both programmed frame rates are automatically assigned to the limits marked FPS 1 and FPS 2 on the handwheel and only changes between these limits are possible. The control of REVERSE shooting in the range 1 to 32 fps is also possible. When the MCB is switched to FPS, the frame rate is set manually and the
Speed Control Box timer is overridden.
SHUTTER Verses IRIS COMPENSATION
(only possible with an iris motor connected to a Lens
Data Box)
Switch the MCB to
<
)
(shutter angle) and the Speed
Control Box COMPENSATION switch to IRIS. Set the iris by means of the iris OPEN/CLOSE buttons. Change the shutter angle by TURNING the handwheel. The resulting iris compensation is done automatically.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
279
Speed Control Box (SCB)
fig.7/5
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
280
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
The Speed Control Box (SCB)
MOUNTING THE SCB TO THE ARRICAM STUDIO
Notice
Before connecting or removing an electrical device like the SCB to or from the camera, it is advised to set OFF the camera MAIN switch.
In order to mount the SCB to the ARRICAM Studio, first remove the upper rear accessory port cover on the camera right side by pressing the release knob and sliding the cover backwards to remove it. After checking that the connectors on the camera and the SCB are clean, insert the three attachment latches of the SCB in the three guiding rails and slide it forward until it is fixed firmly.
Studio SCB mounting
fig.7/6
1.
➡ ➡
2.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
281
Notice
You must remove the Manual Control Box (MCB)
from the camera first before being able to mount the
SCB.
USING THE SCB WITH THE ARRICAM LITE
To keep the ARRICAM Lite lightweight, the use of the
SCB is only possible by linking its SAC connector to the
CAC connector on the camera rear. A further option is to use the Remote Control Station (RCS) (see later in this chapter).
REMOTE USE OF THE MANUAL CONTROL BOX AND SCB
ARRI provides two Cables, the KC 65-S (3 m/10 ft ), the KC 69-S (15 m/50 ft ) and the Cable Drum
KC 73-S (50 m/165 ft) that allow to use the Manual
Control Box and the SCB remotely with the Studio as well as the Lite. If the Remote Control Station is not used, the CAC Distribution Box KC 74-S allows the combined use of both control boxes.
Caution!
• When using a cable longer than 3 m/10 ft to connect the Lens Data Displays to a CAC, the short Compensation Cable KC 77-S must be added in order to obtain the correct impedance. No cable connection (e.g. Cable Drum
+ Cable) can exceed 53 m/175 ft length
• No synchronization cable must be longer than
15 m/50 ft. Therefore, when using the Cable
Drum KC 73-S (50 m/165 ft), no synchroniza-
tion features are available. This will be shown by a blinking warning message
SYN
in the several FPS displays and on the Lens Data Displays.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
282
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
RCS (SCB + MCB) with WHA-2 connection
fig.7/9
WHA-2
WHA-2
WFU-1 wireless focus/iris control
LC-M1-SP-S or
LC-Z1-S
WHA-2
RCS/SCB remote connection
fig.7/10 KC 65-S (3 m/10 ft) or
KC 69-S (15 m/50 ft)
Studio
SAC CAC
CAC
SAC
Lite
Studio
CAC
SAC
SAC
CAC
CAC
CAC
CAC Distribution Box (KC 74-S)
KC 65-S (3 m/10 ft) or
KC 69-S (15 m/50 ft)
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
Lite
283
At the rear of the MCB Cable Adapter and of the RCS
Plate, threaded holes allow the mounting of a fixture like the ARRI quick release Dovetail Accessory Shoe.
RCS MCB Cable Adapter
fig.7/12
Rear
SAC connector
Removable dovetail accessory shoe
Threaded hole
MCB cable adapter scb-cac_hinten
Remote Control
Station RCS
SCB Connectors
SCB CONNECTOR
This connector will automatically link the SCB to the camera or to the Remote Control Station when the SCB is positioned and fitted. Therefore the mounting of the box must be done carefully.
PILOT OUT
Depending on the selected frequency (see PILOT OUT switch on the SCB front) the camera will provide either a 50Hz or 60 Hz pilot signal.
SCB
fig.7/13
SCB camera connector
Connector label
PILOT out
SCB attachments
Left side
SAC connector
SYNC in
VIDEO IN (BNC)
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
284
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
SAC CONNECTOR (ACCESSORY)
Cables are available that will allow that connection of the SCB with e.g. CAC, LDD or WHA-2.
VIDEO IN
In order to synchronize the camera with a video device, use this BNC connector to feed in the external video signal.
SYNC IN
When using an external synchronization reference, connect the cable here between e.g. a pulse generator, a Pick-up Unit or a ”Master” camera.
SCB Controls and Displays
Please note: some of the controls and displays have been designed for future applications.
Fps 1
The six-digit input unit allows preseting a frame rate with an accuracy of 0.001 fps.
Fps 2
The three-digit input unit allows preseting a second frame rate (in whole fps only).
Time
The three-digit input unit allows preseting of the ramping time between 0.1 and 99.9 seconds.
Shutter (Display)
Either the actual shutter angle or further messages listed in chapter 1, page 54 are shown on the SHUTTER display.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
285
Fps (Display)
The seven-digit display shows the actual frame rate and the RUNNING direction. In case another device controls the camera or a problem occurs, further messages listed in chapter 1, page 44 will appear on the FPS display.
LEDS
Please note: The following LED descriptions are only
valid when the SPEED CONTROL switch is set to ON.
= LED glows green
= LED glows red
= LED glows yellow
= LED blinks green
= LED blinks red
= LED blinks yellow
Fps 1 LED
STAND BY/RUNNING
The input unit FPS 1 has been selected.
RUNNING
A change has been made on the SCB input unit
FPS 1 while the camera is RUNNING.
NOT READY
Input frame rate is out of the possible range
Fps 2 LED
RUNNING
The input unit has been selected.
RUNNING
A change of the fps has been made on the SCB input unit while the camera is RUNNING.
NOT READY
Input frame rate is out of the possible range.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
286
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Run LED
RUNNING
Camera is RUNNING at the preset frame rate
RUNNING
Camera is RUNNING UP or DOWN, incl. the amount of time used for the In-camera Slate exposing.
NOT READY
A problem occurs – see warning message on FPS displays, on a Lens Data Display and/or on video monitors.
Time LED
RUNNING
The camera is RUNNING an automatic ramp.
RUNNING
A change of the ramping time has been made on the SCB input unit while the camera is RUNNING.
NOT READY
Input ramping time is too low.
Ramp LED
STAND BY/RUNNING
Shows that the ramp function is possible.
NOT READY
Shows that the ramp function is not possible.
Compensation LED
STAND BY/RUNNING
Shows that the ramp compensation is possible.
NOT READY
Shows that the ramp compensation is not possible.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
287
Remote LED
STAND BY/RUNNING
Remote control signal (e.g. from MCB, WRC) is provided.
Sync LED
STAND BY/RUNNING
The supplied sync signal is ok.
NOT READY
No useable sync signal is supplied to the SCB.
Cal LED
NOT READY
The lens motors must be recalibrated.
NOT READY
The lens will be calibrated.
BUTTONS
Unlock
While pressing the UNLOCK button, slide the SCB to the left and take it away. Do not forget to replace the protecting cover on the camera!
Bright
By pushing the BRIGHT button, you will increase or decrease the brightness of the displays in 3 steps. The steps are 1 (low), 2 (medium), 3 (max). Using this button will not only affect the brightness of the SCB displays but also the ones on the Camera Control Panel and on the other ARRICAM Components including the Lens
Data Display.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
288
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Run
Switches the camera between RUN and STANDBY status. When the camera is stopped, it will return to
STANDBY. When the RUN button is pushed, the camera will RUN UP to the frame rate preset in FPS 1. Any other RUN switches either on or connected to the camera (e.g. Handgrip) will cause the camera to RUN or to
STOP.
Ramp
By pushing the RAMP button, the RUNNING camera will start a ramp procedure according to the preset parameters. When pushed again, it will trigger a new ramping the other way round. When held pushed while the camera is STANDBY, the minimum time possible to
RUN a ramp according to the preset parameters will be displayed alternately with the screen time of the currently set ramp.
Notice
The displayed minimum ramping time will not be fed in the SCB but should be entered manually in the
TIME input unit.
Cal
When mounting an LDS Lens on the camera, push one of the calibration buttons (on a remote control unit or on the SCB) to start the calibration procedure. The lens iris motor will move the lens barrel to both extremes and will save the found limits in memory. Then the motor will place the barrel to the setting of the remote control or of the last one saved in the Lens Data Box. To set the iris to a new setting, use the OPEN and CLOSE buttons.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
289
Caution!
As soon as the gear of a lens motor is coupled with the gear of a lens – regardless if it is an LDS lens or not – the motor should be calibrated in order to avoid possible damage.
Open and close
These two buttons are used to set the required iris aperture.
Sync phase
Pushing the SYNC PHASE button while the PHASE selector is set to MANUAL and the camera is RUN-
NING, shifts the phase relationship between the camera and the sync source.
SWITCHES
Direction
Select between FORWARD and REVERSE filming with the
FWD/REV slide switch. As soon as the REV mode is selected, a minus sign
–
will light up on the SCB’s FPS display, on the Camera Control Panel, on the Studio Readout and
R
will appear on the Lens Data Display.
Compensation
Select between the iris aperture and the shutter angle compensation mode. In the OFF position, no compensation will take place during a speed ramp.
Speed control
By sliding the SPEED CONTROL selector, you may choose between three options:
ON By selecting ON, the SCB is activated and the camera parameters as well as the iris aperture can be controlled by the SCB – at least one FPS
LED lights up.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
290
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
SYNC By selecting SYNC, all the possibilities offered by the synchronization section, located in the lower panel (labelled blue), of the SCB are activated.
Please remember that these functions will not work if the 50 m/165 ft Cable Drum is used.
If a Manual Control Box is installed, switching to
SYNC will override its settings.
OFF By selecting OFF, all controls of the SCB except the RUN button are turned OFF. The frame rate and the shutter opening are now set according to the values input on the Camera Control Panel.
Video in 75 Ω
This two-position switch is normally set to ON if a video signal is fed in the camera. If a video signal is forwarded from one ARRICAM to another device, e.g. second camera, slide the switch to ON (75 Ω termination) on the last camera in chain. If you are unsure, try both settings to see which works better, particularly for any monitors on the same video circuit.
Pilot out
Select the frequency of the outgoing pilotone signal
– either 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
Phase
When the PHASE switch is set to MANUAL, the SYNC
PHASE button allows the phase between the sync source and the camera to be changed.
Ratio
The RATIO switch allows the selection of 5 different preset division ratios between supplied sync frequency and resulting fps, (1/1, 2/1, 3/1, 4/1, 5/2) – for details see page 298.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
291
FUNCTIONS AND OPERATIONS OF THE SPEED
CONTROL BOX
Three different tasks can be performed with the SCB:
1. The camera basic control
The frame rate can be adjusted with a precision of
1/1000 fps. Also REVERSE filming can be selected.
2. The ramping control
By entering a second frame rate, the change from the first one to the second one can be programmed.
Also the necessary exposure compensation can be executed automatically, either by changing the shutter angle or – if a lens motor is connected to a Lens
Data Box – the iris aperture. Furthermore, the ramping time can be set – depending on the range of the ramp and the kind of compensation – between 0.1 sec and 99.9 sec.
3. The synchronization
The synchronization of the camera speed with an external device like a video or computer monitor, another camera or a projector, can be easily achieved with the SCB.
SCB
fig.7/14
REMOTE LED
SPEED CONTROL switch
SYNC LED
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
292
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
START UP
When the camera is connected to the power supply, the MAIN switch is set to ON and no problem occurs, the camera will be in STANDBY and the two displays will show the frame rate of the camera,
0.000
fps and the shutter angle e.g.
180.0
. Accordingly, as soon as the camera is RUNNING, the actual frame rate and the actual shutter angle will be shown, e.g.
24.000
and
180.0
.
Notice
If a remote control unit like the Wireless Remote
Control or the Manual Control Box is connected to the camera and activated, the remote LED will glow green regardless of whether the SPEED CONTROL switch is set to ON or OFF. In this case, the FPS displays will indicate the controlling device, e.g. MCB on the Standard Camera Control Panel. On the
Extended Camera Control Panel, the indication of the controlling device will only appear when a button of the FPS selector is pushed.
Caution!
If, while the camera is RUNNING, the FPS figures start to alternate with the warning message
BAT
, you should be aware that the low battery threshold has been crossed – but the camera will continue to RUN until it can no longer reach the preset frame rate anymore. Only then, the camera will STOP and go into the NOT READY status.
If the
BAT
warning message appears while the camera is STANDBY, it will automatically change to NOT READY so that you will have to change the battery.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
293
FRAME RATE CONTROL
SCB
fig.7/15
UNLOCK button
FPS display
FPS 1 LED
FPS 1 input unit
RUN LED
RUN button
DIRECTION switch
FPS 1
UNLOCK
FPS
RUN DIRECTION
FWD
REV
Although the two FPS selectors apparently permit the setting of higher speeds, you may actually only select frame rates between 1 and 40 (Lite) or 60 fps (Studio)
FORWARD and between 1 and 32 fps REVERSE. Presuming that the SPEED CONTROL switch is set to ON
(the SCB has control of the camera), when the RUN button is pushed, the camera will go from STANDBY to
RUN and SPEED UP to the fps shown in the active input unit – the one with the illuminated green LED above. The
SCB allows the setting of frame rates to an accuracy of
1/1000th fps to match the camera speed with reference to other devices.
RAMP FUNCTION
The SCB also allows the camera to change between two preset frame rates in a given time span called the ramp time. Furthermore, the SCB provides the ability to compensate the exposure by adjusting automatically either the iris aperture or the mirror shutter angle proportionally to the actual frame rate. This iris compensation is only possible with an LDS Lens, when the lens motor has been connected to the Lens Data Box and its calibration performed.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
294
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Using a Wireless Remote Control, non LDS Lenses can also be used for iris compensation.
SCB
fig.7/16
ARRICAM
SPEED CONTROL BOX
SHUTTER BRIGHT
SHUTTER display
BRIGHT button
TIME input unit/LED
FPS 2 input unit/LED
RAMP
OPEN
CLOSE
COMPENSATION
SHUTTER
OFF
IRIS
LCS
CAL
RAMP LED
COMPENSATION LED
COMPENSATION switch
RAMP button
CALibration LED
Iris CALibration button
Iris control buttons
The two frame rates are programmed by pushing small buttons in fps input units labelled FPS 1 and FPS 2. The
FPS 1 input unit allows the user to preset a frame rate with an accuracy of 0.001 fps. The specific acceleration – or deceleration – time within which the camera should change over to the other preset frame rate can be adjusted within the range from 0.1 to 99.9 sec.
Certain physical dynamics limit the minimum ramp time therefore, if you preset, by means of the TIME input unit, a ramp time that is too short for the desired ramp and compensation, the TIME LED, the RAMP LED and the
RUN LED will immediately light up red to warn that the camera is NOT READY. Presuming that a certain fps
(e.g. FPS 1) and a ramp time are already preset, the
TIME LED and the RAMP LED will automatically light up red when you introduce an fps (e.g. FPS 2) that requires a longer ramping time. When shooting, the TIME LED will glow green during the automatic RAMPING.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
295
To trigger a speed ramp, push the RAMP button while the camera is RUNNING. The camera will start to change the frame rate in order to reach the second one in the selected time. As soon as the camera has reached the FPS 2 frame rate, you may push the RAMP button again and the camera will change the frame rate back until it reaches the preset value FPS 1.
If the camera is STOPPED and STARTED again, FPS 1 will automatically become the initial frame rate. If the
Manual Control Box is used, the initial frame rate can be approximately set with the handwheel (its two end stops being FPS 1 and FPS 2).
SELECTION OF THE EXPOSURE COMPENSATION MODE
If the COMPENSATION switch is set to one of the two compensation modes, compensation will start as soon as you start the RAMPING procedure by pushing the
RAMP button or by turning the Manual Control Box handwheel. One should be aware that the automatic compensation is only possible in a defined range! This range cannot extend 4 shutter stops or 6 iris stops.
As soon as COMPENSATION has been selected, the
SCB computer will calculate the alteration of the shutter angle or the iris aperture according to the change of the frame rate. This occurs automatically, regardless if the camera is RUNNING FORWARD or REVERSE. If compensation is not possible, the COMPENSATION LED will light up red.
IRIS compensation
If IRIS compensation is selected, one should be aware that a change of the depth of field will occur. The following table should help you to find out if the intended iris compensation is possible.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
296
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
SHUTTER compensation
If SHUTTER compensation is selected, stroboscopic effect must seriously be considered because a narrow shutter angle (very short exposure time) will reduce the motion blur. If no stroboscopic effect is desired, a narrow shutter angle will strongly limit the freedom to move the camera quickly.
Notice
The SCB will automatically pair the highest speed
with a 180° shutter angle and calculate all other
shutter angles based on the resulting exposure time.
Examples
FPS 1 1,5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 48 60
IRIS 22 16 11 8 5.6 4 2.8 2.2
SYNCHRONIZATION AND PHASE SHIFTING
The SCB can be programmed very precisely and may therefore be used to synchronize the camera to either a video signal or a computer screen. Moreover, the synchronization of the camera with a signal provided by a projector or another camera is possible. There are three different input signals which the SCB can accept. If a signal is supplied to the VIDEO IN connector and also the
SYNC IN connector, the VIDEO IN connector has priority.
• A video signal can be fed into the VIDEO IN BNC connector.
• The ARRI Pick-up Unit can be connected to the SYNC
IN connector.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
297
• Any signal from 3 to 30 V with a frequency of 3 to
100 Hz can be fed into the SYNC IN connector.
SCB
fig.7/17
RATIO selector
VIDEO signal terminator
PILOT signal selector
PHASE mode
PHASE button
For the SYNC function, a Pick-up Unit connected with the cable (KC 66-S) is used to sense the SYNC signal from cathode ray tube (CRT) monitors – synchronization with TFT screens is not necessary. A similar cable should be used for connecting other pulse generators to the
SCB, e.g. a power generator or a film projector.
When synchronizing two or more cameras, one will be the master and the other ones will be slave.
The KC 78-S cable is connected betwen the CAC connector of the master camera and the SYNC IN connector of SCB linked to the slave camera. If two or more cameras must be synchronized to an external sync reference, e.g. a video monitor, feed either the external video signal to the VIDEO IN connector or the external sync signal to the SYNC IN connector of the SCB linked to the first camera and connect the others as explained above.
With the RATIO switch, one of 5 ratios can be selected:
(1/1, 2/1, 3/1, 4/1, 5/2). So the following settings can be selected:
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
298
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
setting ratio sync frequency resulting fps
0 1/1 50 Hz 50 fps
1 2/1 50 Hz 25 fps
2 3/1 75 Hz 25 fps
3 4/1 100 Hz 25 fps
4 5/2 60 Hz 24 fps
5, 6, 7, 8, 9 1/1 3 – 60 Hz 3 - 60 fps
The phase setting determines the start of the exposure for each film frame in relation to when the image is drawn on the video monitor. The visible result is the angled horizontal bar you can see when looking through the viewfinder while the camera is RUNNING.
First try the position FIXED of the PHASE switch. FIXED is a phase default setting that should work in most cases.
SCB remote sync connection
fig.7/18
Lite
KC 65-S or KC 69-S
slave
CAC
SAC
TV-set sync in
CAC
BNC (to video in)
KC 78-S (to CAC)
pick-up unit
KC 66-S (to sync in)
video in sync in master
Studio
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
299
If you still see the horizontal bar, switch to MANUAL and use the PHASE button to move the bar to where it is least visible. The SCB will remember the phase relationship (the position of the bar) between takes.
Exception:
If the RATIO is set to 1/1, then the best film image is usually obtained when the viewfinder image is at its worst. As always, confirm with a film test.
Caution!
No synchronization cable can be longer than
15 m/50 ft. Therefore the Pick-up Unit or the video cable should not exceed this length.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
300
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Timing Shift Box (TSB)
Timing
(+180/–180) scale
TIMING OFFSET display
JITTER button
Timing shift direction (+/–)
Timing shift degree
JITTER level (1/2/3) bar graph
Handwheel
TIMING SHIFT
(ON/LOCK/OFF) switch
The Timing Shift Box (TSB), allows the creation of a streaking effect by manually adjusting the phase relationship of the mirror shutter to the movement. The timing shift effect can be adjusted from very faint to very strong.
The jitter function introduces a random fluctuation in the effect, resulting in a shimmering variation of the streak’s length.
MOUNTING
Like the Manual Control Box, the TSB can be attached directly to the Studio, to the Remote Control Station or connected via cable to the Studio and Lite – see
Manual Control Box section of this chapter.
COMPATIBILITY
The TSB can be used simultaneously with the Manual
Control Box and/or the Speed Control Box e.g. to combine the streaking effect with a ramping effect.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
301
CONTROLLING THE TIMING SHIFT EFFECT
The white part of the Timing (+180/-180) scale is where the effect covers only parts of the image, the black part is where the effect covers the whole image.
The drop shaped labels indicate which way the streaks will go (up or down), and at which edge the effect will start. On the display, (+) shows that the streaks will start on the right edge and go up, (–) while shows the opposite way.
PERFORMING A CONSTANT TIMING SHIFT EFFECT
• Set the TIMING SHIFT switch to ON.
• Adjust the effect levels by turning the handwheel and pressing the JITTER button.
• Set the TIMING SHIFT switch to LOCK. Now the current settings will be memorised and the handwheel as well as the JITTER button will have no control.
PERFORMING A TIMING SHIFT RAMP
• Set the TIMING SHIFT switch to ON.
• A timing shift ramp can be achieved in turning the handwheel while the camera is running.
CONTROLLING THE JITTER EFFECT
Press the JITTER button to change the jitter level. A bar graph to the left of the display shows the JITTER (1/2/
3) level. With each press of the button the TSB will step through the 4 levels: 0 (none), 1 (low), 2 (medium) and
3 (high).
Notice
Camera noise may increase when using the jitter effect.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
302
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Remote Control Station (RCS)
If the use of the SCB together with the MCB is intended, both components can be fixed on the Remote Control
Station.
The mounting of the SCB on the adapter is similar to the one on the STUDIO body.
Remote Control Station (RCS)
fig.7/7
MCB holder
MCB connector
Left side front
▲
MCB holder connector
Accessory shoe
SCB attachment
RCS plate
SCB connector
Top
On top of the RCS Plate, a fixture for the MCB Holder as well as an Accessory Shoe is located. After removing the little cover on top of the RCS, the MCB Holder can be fixed with one 3 mm hex screw. The MCB will be mounted on the Holder in the same way it is fixed to the camera.
An SAC plug for connection with a camera, an LDD plug and an WHA-2 connector are located on the RCS right side. A manual remote control unit – e.g. for iris, focus and zoom – mounted on WHA-2 can be plugged on the Remote Control Station.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
303
RCS SCB + MCB – front
fig.7/8
MCB hand-wheel accessory shoe
SAC connector
RCS plate
WHA-2 connector
SCB
LDD connector
right side
Because the SAC connector of the RCS is similar to the ones of the SCB and the MCB Cable Adapter, the same cables can be used for connecting the Remote
Control Station with the camera.
Mounting and Connection
• Mount the SCB to the RCS Plate in the same way as on the Studio.
• Fix the MCB/TSB Holder on top of the RCS with one
3 mm hex screw.
• Mount the MCB or TSB on the MCB/TSB Holder in the same way as on the MCB Cable Adapter.
The ARRI Dovetail System allows placing the RCS e.g. on the camera left side (with Rod Clamp, Rosette Bracket) or to the Lite Camera Handle with the 3/8” Clamp.
The Cables KC 65-S or KC 69-S allows connecting the
RCS (SAC connector) with the camera (CAC connector)
Notice
No sync function is possible when using the Cable
Drum KC 73-S (50 m/165 ft).
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
304
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
COMPATIBILTY
The Remote Control Station (RCS) allows the use of the following Accessories remotely from the camera:
•Speed Control Box (SCB),
•Manual Control Box (MCB),
•Timing Shift Box (TSB),
•Wired Handset Adapter (WHA-2) with Wireless Focus
Unit (WFU-1) and Wireless Zoom Unit (WZU-1) or
Wireless Remote Control (WRC-1),
•Lens Data Display (LDD),
•Lens Data Diaplay for Focus Puller (LDD-FP)
ARRICAM Studio or Lite
(CAC connector)
Manual Control
Box(MCB) OR
MCB/TSB
Holder
Wireless
Zoom
Unit
(WZU-1)
Wireless
Focus
Unit
(WFU-1)
Timing Shift
Box(TSB)
Speed Control
Box (SCB)
SAC
WHA-2
LDD
Remote Control
Station (RCS)
Lens Data Display for
Focus Puller (LDD-FP)
OR
Wireless
Remote
Control
(WRC-1)
Wired Handset
Adapter (WHA-2)
OR
Lens Data
Display (LDD)
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
305
Final Remark
Using Accessory Boxes:
• One Speed Control Box is not able to
control two cameras simultaneously!
Even though it is possible to connect one box to two cameras simultaneously, this must never be done! So for example, if a Speed Control Box is mounted on a STUDIO, do not connect a second camera (e.g. a LITE or a second STUDIO) with a cable to this box!
• One camera cannot be controlled by
two similar boxes simultaneously!
Even though it is possible to connect two similar boxes to one camera at the same time, this must never be done! So for example, if a Speed Control Box is mounted on a STUDIO, do not connect a second Speed Control Box with a cable to this camera.
7 – THE CAMERA CONTROL BOXES
306
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
THE ARRICAM IN-CAMERA SLATE SYSTEM
The In-camera Slate Box
WHAT’S THE MEANING OF THE ISB SYSTEM?
The In-camera Slate Box System (ISB) allows recording of characters – the information usually written on a slate board – in the picture area of the film and, instead of the ”clap”, to record a visual sync cue provided by a time-code generator built in the In-camera Slate Box.
At the beginning and/or end of each take, the camera exposes all slate information (e.g. take identifications) together with the time-code. The take identifications as well as camera status info and further data are fed in the system by means of a handheld computer and by the camera itself.
TIME-CODE BASICS
In order to identify the take of a scene, the board has been invented.
In order to synchronize sound with pictures recorded on two different supports, the clapping of two pieces of wood in front of the camera and near to the microphone has been introduced. And so, for about 80 years, the clap board has been very useful in almost all film productions. Certainly, the camera and the sound recorder must RUN synchronously to each other. Therefore, first the pilot cable and later the extremely precise quartz crystal has been adopted to control the speed of both machines.
Being aware that two events – which must be later synchronized in the editing room – happened at the same moment while recorded, it is obviously possible to achieve the synchronization in finding on both media
(e.g. 35mm film and sound tape) the time identification
(time-code) of the event. And therefore, extremely pre-
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
309
cise clocks have been installed in almost all professional sound recorders. Similar clocks – they are called timecode generators – are also present in several camera systems. To be sure that the synchronization of timecodes will go well, it is obvious that all clocks used during shooting, maybe with more than one camera, must be synchronized first. Therefore all these clocks will have to be synchronized with one reference master clock.
Between the first orders ROLL SOUND, ROLL CAMERAS and during the announcement of the board, and before
ACTION will be asked, a lot of footage is exposed. In fact, the clapper loader has to read the information written on the board before clapping it. But to synchronize both supports, only the identification and the clap are relevant, and this can be read in just a few frames!
Notice
The idiom JAM means for film people mostly that film has stuck either in a magazine or in the camera, so it is a problem.
The same idiom JAM is used in the electronic world
– and used in this chapter – defines a synchronization operation, and this is absolutely not a problem.
THE ARRICAM IN-CAMERA SLATE SYSTEM
The ARRICAM In-camera Slate System has been conceived on the practice of clapping a board. All the board information entered with a small handheld PC in the
In-camera Slate Box is, together with some camera status information, exposed on a few frames at the beginning and/or end of each take. This data are entered with the time-code generated in the In-camera Slate Box
(ISB).
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
310
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
The In-camera Slate exposing is enabled by a small
Exposure Module consisting of tiny LEDs in a matrix below the gate aperture. To be legible easily, the slate is exposed only while the shutter is closed to 0° (the
SHUTTER display/s will show
ISB 0
). As soon as the
In-camera Slate has been exposed, it will fade out and the shutter will open instantly to the preset angle. Consequently, after ROLL CAMERAS, the (Assistant) Director must just wait for a very short moment before saying
ACTION!
A head slate uses around 20 empty frames and 18 frames of data when the camera is started and about
26 when it is stopped. A tail slate takes up no frames when the camera is started, but around 40 when it is stopped.
In-camera Slate Box (ISB)
fig.8/1
TC I/0 connector (for jaming)
TC LED
SLATE EXPOSURE LED
Label
Front
TEST button
Exposure module on/off switch
Mounting screws
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
311
Time-code graphic
fig.8/2
Film running direction
Exposure
Emulsion
In-camera slate
In-camera Slates
fig.8/3
Examples of in-camera slates
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
312
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
THE ARRICAM IN-CAMERA SLATE IN POST
PRODUCTION
The In-camera Slate is a legible and machine readable text within the film frame. Therefore In-camera Slates can be used in post-production in the same way as conventional slates: the editor can read and use the slate and time-code information. It is now possible to work with a time stamp at any filming frame rate, since the
In-camera Slate System always guarantees clear identification. Automatic reading of In-camera Slate information in the electronic post-production process is also possible with a special ARRI Optical Character Recognition
Software (OCR). The resulting Take-list can be directly transferred to non-linear editing systems. The time-code information can also be used for syncing audio.
ADVANTAGES OFFERED WHEN USING THE
IN-CAMERA SLATE SYSTEM
• the In-camera Slate is always on the film and always clearly readable;
• consumption of film material is reduced since the Incamera Slate exposes only onto a few frames;
• post-production is possible without additional tools since the In-camera Slate works almost like a conventional slate;
• in video post-production, an automatic Take-list can be created with the help of an automatic slate reader
(OCR). There is no longer the need to log the data while transferring the film to video.
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
313
COMPATIBILITY
The In-camera Slate Box (ISB) fits on both ARRICAM
Studio and ARRICAM Lite. On the LITE, the LT Lens Data
Box must be present to mount the ISB. STUDIO and LITE accept the same Exposure Module.
The following five components allow the use of the
In-camera Slate Box System:
• The In-camera Slate Box (ISB) contains the electronics, the connectors, the switch, the LEDs as well as the time-code generator and its supporting batteries.
• The handheld computer (with its own serial connector cable) is used as a remote control unit for entering and editing data in the ISB System.
• The connector cable 9-pin serial plug to ISB (16-pin
Fischer plug).
• The Exposure Module which has to be installed in the camera by an ARRICAM Maintenance Technician.
• The In-camera Slate reader OCR Software for the post-production houses.
THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX AND THE SPEED
CONTROL BOX
Using the In-camera Slate Box together with a Speed
Control Box is only requested when other frame rates than 24, 25 or 30 fps are needed and the camera is not fitted with the Extended Camera Control Panel. This
Panel as well as the SCB enable presetting frame rates like 23.976 fps or 29.970 fps.
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
314
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
MOUNTING THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX ON THE
STUDIO
First turn OFF the camera MAIN switch, unscrew the two retaining 3 mm hex screws and remove the protecting cover. Being sure that both connectors are clean, mount the ISB carefully on the STUDIO and fasten the two mounting screws.
USING THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX WITH THE LITE
The ISB cannot be fixed on the LITE itself but must be attached to the LT Lens Data Box (LT-LDB). When the
LT- LDB is already attached to the LITE, unscrew the single 3 mm screw, remove the cover, and – being sure that the camera is not powered – mount the ISB and tighten the two screws.
THE POWERING OF THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
The ISB is permanently powered as long as it is connected to a powered camera, irrespective of the ON or
OFF setting of the camera MAIN switch.
Even though the camera is not powered or the
In-camera Slate Box is not connected to the camera, the ISB built-in time-code clock needs power. To keep it running while the camera is disconnected from power, two AA 1.5 V batteries must be inserted into the battery compartment located on the ISB right side. If the TC LED slowly flashes red, these batteries need to be replaced.
If the TC has been re-jammed more than 10 hours ago the TC LED glows red. Whenever this LED glows red, you have to re-jam the ISB.
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
315
Caution!
If the camera power is switched OFF and ON, the TC starts at 00:00:00:00 but this new TC is not usable.
As soon as the TC has been re-jammed the TC LED will change to green. Independently from power supply all other data of the ISB are saved in it’s internal flash memory.
ISB
fig.8/4
Right side
Studio – ISB mounting
fig.8/5
Mounting screws
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
316
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Lite – ISB mounting
fig.8/6
Lite Lens Data Box
Mounting screws
THE CONNECTORS, CONTROLS, LED DISPLAYS AND
LABEL ON THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
The ISB Camera Connector
On the rear of the ISB, a connector will link the camera electronics with the In-camera Slate System. Before installing the ISB, it is necessary to switch the camera
MAIN switch OFF. Be careful when mounting or removing the Box from the camera body or from the LT Lens
Data Box, the connection must happen smoothly.
The TC I/O Connector
The 5-pin Lemo connector must be used exclusively for connecting the In-camera Slate Box with a master clock
(Ambient, Soundrecorder, etc.).
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
317
The In-Camera Slate System Switch
The time-code functionality is provided as soon as the
ISB is connected to a camera. When setting the
IN-CAMERA SLATE switch to ON, the functions of the
Exposure Module are provided. This switch is not powering the ISB.
The Label
A label on the In-camera Slate Box explains the various states of the two status LEDs.
ISB Label
fig.8/7
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
318
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
LEDS
= LED glows red
= LED blinks red
= LED blinks slowly red
= LED glows green
= LED blinks green
The TC (Time-code) LED
The time-code is set and the In-camera Slate works correctly.
One of the following frame rate has been preset:
24 fps, 25 fps or 30 fps in realtime mode,
23.976 fps or 29.970 fps in non-realtime NDF
(Non Drop Frame) mode.
Time-code is set, but either, none of the matching frame rates (see above) has been selected – or the last jam-syncing was done 9 to 10 hours ago.
REMEDY: re-jam soon!
The time-code has not been set or the last jamsyncing was done more than 10 hours ago.
REMEDY: re-jam soon!
The capacity of the supporting batteries is low or the camera is not powered.
Replace the supporting batteries (2 x 1.5 V AA)
– see fig. 8/4.
Notice
Changing the batteries while the ISB is mounted on a powered camera will keep up the TC function.
However the LED will stop blinking after one minute if the new batteries are full.
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
319
Slate Exposure LED
The slate exposure is ready
The slate exposure is not ready because either the
Exposure Module has not been detected and/or the ISB self-test failed.
REMEDY: Check the equipment and/or consult an
ARRICAM Maintenance Centre.
The In-camera Slate System TEST Button
As long as the TEST button is pushed while the camera is Standby, the Exposure Module will be shortly activated in order to allow checking not only if this Module is installed but also if the LEDs correctly light up. Furthermore, information about the actually saved slate information will be displayed on a video monitor and the
ISB battery voltage will be shown on the FPS display(s).
AND NOW, AGAIN A BIT OF THEORY
What is a Master Clock?
Usually, the sound recorder has a built-in time-code generator. Connecting a cable between the sound recorder and the ISB connector will allow simple and efficient jam-syncing. If this is not possible, use an independant master clock. Besides others, the Ambient
Clockit Controller ACC 101 portable TC generator/ tester is a master clock which offers very good compatibility with the ARRICAM In-camera Slate System. Its controller is an extremely accurate portable master clock and time-code generator/reader which can be used to synchronize (jam), read, identify, and compare all timecodes. All frame rates are catered for, and the frame rate can be changed without loosing time of day, enabling a camera RUNNING at 24 frames and a recorder RUNNING at 25 or 30 frames to be jam-synced.
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
320
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Userbit format options allow easy entering of data in the form required. With the added facility of internal Xtal calibration, it can be used as a master clock to calibrate time-code recorders and film cameras in the field.
What does Jam-syncing time-code mean?
In a basic SMPTE synchronization scenario, time-code is fed from one device (the master) to a second device
(the slave). The slave device follows the time locations as transmitted by the master device. If the master device counts one hour and thirteen minutes (expressed as 01:
13:00:00; Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frames), the slave device follows it there. The problem arises when the master device’s SMPTE time-code has an error in it. In most situations, the slave device would not know what to do for a split second since it has missing instructions from its host. It would stutter or stop completely. By using jam-syncing, the slave device can be instructed to ignore small dropouts of time-code from the master, thus ensuring smooth synchronization. To do this, it generates its own time-code whenever the master’s time-code is missing. Jam-sync is usually an optional mode that the user can select.
What is the difference between Single and Continuous Jam-syncing?
While shooting, the TC OUT connector of a master clock is permanently wired with the TC IN connector on the ISB. This master clock (it can be integrated in the sound recorder) provides continuously a sync reference signal to the ISB. So the ISB time-code is synchronized permanently with an external TC device – Continuous
Jam-syncing mode is applied. The TC cable must be connected all the time.
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
321
After having synchronized just once the ISB (this operation lasts about 1 sec.) the cable between the ISB and the master clock is disconnected. The camera remains synced with the ISB buit-in time-code generated signal.
This method is called Single Jam-syncing. The TC cable can be removed.
The high accuracy of the Single Jam-syncing method combined with the freedom of working wireless establishes this method as a default mode. Continuous Jamsyncing is only needed e.g. in case of play back filming where a sound device is wound back and forth and requires the camera time-code to follow.
Use the handheld PC for selecting the syncing mode.
PRACTICAL ADVICES ON HOW TO USE THE
IN-CAMERA SLATE SYSTEM
Notice
We suggest ISB users to involve the lab and the post-production house in the preparation and the testing of the equipment. Furthermore, it is recommended to assign one person (camera, sound or video dept.) responsible for all In-camera Slate operations.
Before starting a production, it is important to check the equipment:
Test the system as follows:
1. Set the camera MAIN switch to ON.
2. Set the In-camera Slate switch to ON.
3. Push the TEST button on the In-camera Slate Box
– both LEDs should briefly fade out and then glow green or red. If the SLATE EXPOSURE LED glows red,
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
322
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
a problem occurs. The cause will be displayed on a video monitor – most probably no ISB Exposure
Module is installed in the camera.
4. Go to the other side of the camera and open the camera door. Rotate the movement locking lever clockwise to slide the movement to its rear position.
Look at the lower part of the movement (under the slot for the inside pull down claw). Reach around the camera, and push the TEST button again. The Exposure Module LEDs, which is located right behind the
ISB window in the Aperture Plate, will flash 5 times, and you should see red reflections of these flashes on the lower part of the movement. If you do not see these flashes, the Exposure Module may not be installed or is damaged.
When starting a shooting day:
1. The Focus Puller or another member of the camera department together with friends at the sound department and most probably also at the video department will have to synchronize all used devices with one master clock. This operation is often called jam-syncing.
2. The Loaders will have to enter the film sensitivity (ASA) into each magazine. Only when the Cinematographer decides to change the laboratory process, the
ASA rating will have to be re-adjusted accordingly.
3. The synchronization of the camera movement with the In-camera Slate time-code generator will occur as soon as the ISB is connected to the camera.
Caution!
However, the adequate synchronization mode can be selected by means of the Video Assist configuration menu VIDEO CONFIG – see chapter 5 page 72.
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
323
• camera synced OFF: the camera is not synchronized by TC nor by the Video Assist. It will be synchronized by the SCB if selected at this box.
• camera synced VID: the camera is synchronized by the Video Assist.
• camera synced TC: The camera is synchronized by the TC of the ISB. This mode allows also to synchronize the Video Assist with an external signal.
MENU VIDEO CONFIG
FLICKERFREE
EXPOS: TIME
LINE INTERP.
Y/C (SVHS) DATA
MINI MON. DATA
VID SYNC
–> CAMERA SYNCED
PHASE 0 – 356
EXIT
= ON
= FILM
= ON
= ON
= OFF
= EXT (NOT TC)
= TC
= 0.0
4. Last but not least, one must feed all slate information into the In-camera Slate System before shooting.
Therefore a connection to a consumer handheld personal computer running windows CE 3.0 (or later version) is necessary.
Caution!
• At the beginning of each shooting day and after about four hours (after the break for lunch), the camera(s) and the sound recorder have to be re-synchronized (re-jam for short) with the master clock.
• The slate exposing works at any camera speed and shooting direction, but you must be sure to set the film speed (ASA) on the magazine – see chapter 2, page 80 – to have the correct exposure.
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
324
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
THE EVERYDAY JOB
Convention:
The following description is based on the use of an iPAQ handheld PC from Compaq® together with an external flash card. On this flash card the ARRICAM ISB
Remote Control Software V 1.020 has been installed by the ARRICAM Maintenance Centre. In other handheld
PC, the program can be saved on the integrated ROM memory. If the program ARRICAM does not appear in the start menu of the iPAQ handheld PC it has to be reloaded (after more than about two weeks without power). The procedure depends on the type of handheld PC used. Please see the document the ISB Remote
Control Software – appendix 1, Restoring the Program from Flash. The document is delivered with every handheld PC and can also be downloaded from the
ARRI.com web page. More information about the ISB
Software, the start menu and the restore procedure can also be downloaded from this web page.
THE SYNCHRONIZATION (JAM-SYNCING) OF THE
IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
Connect an external time-code source (e.g. audio recorder, master clock) to the TC I/O connector on the
In-camera Slate Box (pin1 = GND, pin2 = LTC in, pin5
= LTC out). As soon as a jam-syncing is completed, the
TC LED should glow green. For more information see the manual of the master clock.
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
325
ERRORS AND WARNINGS
Errors like e.g. ”no Exposure Module detected” or ”ISB
selftest failed” and warnings like ”Battery of ISB is
low” or ”TC is not set”, will be encountered on the Main
Menu and explained in the Error/Warning Sub-menu.
You can also read this information on the video monitor.
Exception: Loss of communication
Whenever the communication with the ISB System is lost, the ISB Remote Control Software displays <void> in the text fields of the Main Menu. All data entered or edited before the lost of communication remains in the
ISB memory. Changes of the status of the camera (RUN/
STOP) which are saved in the ISB will be correctly reported to the iPAQ as soon as the connection is fixed.
SETTING UP
Use the iPAQ to enter new information or edit existing information that is stored in the In-camera Slate Box. See the manuals of the iPAQ and the one of Windows CE
3.0 for more information about the Mobile Computing
System. The communication is based on the RS 232 connection.
Before entering or editing data, you must first connect the iPAQ with the ARRICAM Camera – not with the
In-camera Slate Box!
1. Set the camera MAIN switch to OFF
2. To connect the iPAQ to the ARRICAM Camera, two cables are necessary: Plug the round 16 pin male
Fischer connector of the ARRI cable KC-H-1 into the
Camera Accessory Connector labelled CAC. At the other end, a DSUB 9 pin male connector will be plugged into the iPAQ own cable. The second
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
326
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
cable, which is an accessory of the iPAQ, will have on one end a DSUB 9 pin female connector and on the other one the special iPAQ connector.
3. Set the camera MAIN switch to ON and turn the iPAQ ON. The IN-CAMERA SLATE switch doesn’t have to be set to ON.
4. Touch the Windows icon on the top left of the screen to display the Main Menu. Choose the ARRICAM icon to launch the controller program.
5. Once the program is running, the slate information stored in the ISB is displayed on the iPAQ screen which popped up first the Main Menu.
OPERATION
By following the navigation of the menu, enter the slate information by using the virtual keyboard or the handwriting function of the iPAQ.
Some of the slate information including e.g. production name, director’s name, etc. will be set once at the beginning of the production. In similarity to the traditional board, all scene identification numbers must be entered whenever a scene number changes. The preset take number automatically increases by one after each take (camera RUN and STOP).
Notice
• Do not forget to check the power condition of the iPAQ!
• Do not forget to set TC at the video configuration menu!
• Be aware that after each take, take numbers will be incremented automatically by the In-camera
Slate Box – if they are not changed manually with the iPAQ!
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
327
USING THE MENU STRUCTURE
The Main Menu
The Main Menu is divided into four Sub-menus: CUR-
RENT TIMECODE, NEXT SLATE, TAKELIST (LAST TAKE), and ERRORS/WARNINGS. For each Sub-menu the most important information of the respective ISB System are shown, either in a Dialogue Box or an Info Box.
iPAQ Main Menu
fig.8/8
time-code dialogue box
> edit/view all time code settings
slate dialogue box
> edit/view all slate settings
take-list info box
> view single take-list entries
>> view whole take-list
errors/warnings info box
> view errors and warnings
The function fields
Edit None of the fields of the Main Menu is editable. For changing time-code or slate settings the field Edit of the CURRENT
TIMECODE and NEXT SLATE Sub-menu must be activated.
More The two More buttons open Dialogue
Boxes for browsing the take-list entries and for inspecting errors and warnings reported from the ISB System.
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
328
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
The info fields
Time the value of the actual time-code.
Userbits the value of the actual userbits.
TC-fps the actual frame rate of the TC generator.
Slate Slate identification entred by the user.
Scene Scene identification entred by the user.
Next Take Suggested next take number incremented by the System.
AI Shows the automatic incrementation of the take number by the System.
Start TC Starting time of the last take.
Frames The frame amount of the last take.
Start fps The frame rate at starting of the last take.
Errors Number of errors reported by the ISB.
Warnings Number of warnings reported by the ISB.
Depending on the kind of data you would like to enter or edit, touch the adequate Edit field to enter the Submenus:
• To edit time-code relevant data select the CURRENT
TIMECODE Dialogue Box.
• To edit the scene/take relevant identification select the NEXT SLATE Dialogue Box.
USING THE DIALOGUE AND INFO BOXES
Using the Edit field of the CURRENT TIMECODE Submenu leads to a Dialogue Box where several figures and modes are displayed and also may be changed.
When a field of the Dialogue Box is activated by touching it, changes can be done. The value can be changed by using either touching arrows, writing in the field or selecting an option in a drop menu.
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
329
Do not forget to touch Apply for saving your selection into the ISB memory!
If you have to change several data at once in a
Dialogue Box, only one touch on Apply at the end of the manipulation is necessary.
As soon as Apply is touched, a little clock icon will show that the computer is updating.
By touching Back you will return to the Main Menu.
Caution!
When Back is touched, no downloading of the
new settings to the ISB System will occur.
Time-code can only be (re-)synchronized by manual editing or by re-jamming.
Pushing the Apply field is not sufficient!
Please note that jamming time-code is more accurate than editing via handheld PC.
iPAQ Current Timecode Dialogue Box
fig.8/9
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
330
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
THE CURRENT TIMECODE DIALOGUE BOX
Before the Dialogue Box opens, the current time-code settings are uploaded from the ISB System to the ISB
Remote Control Software.
TC-Time Shows the current time of the ISB timecode clock. This field is refreshed every second. By touching the TC-Time field, it will be activated and you will be able to change the time.
Userbits Shows the actual settings that can be changed here.
Speedmode Shows the current setting of the speed mode. It is possible to toggle between
Realtime and NDF (Non Drop Frame) mode.
Date Shows the current setting of the date of the ISB System. The date may be changed between 1.1.2000 and
31.12.2099
TC-fps Shows the current speed settings of the
ARRICAM. This field cannot be edited.
Operation Allows to toggle the sync mode of the mode ISB System. It is possible to toggle between Continuous Jam-sync and
Single Jam-sync.
Toggle There are two sources for changing the sources speed mode: Jam or the local input selected in the Speedmode field. The two little circle fields allow to toggle between these two modes.
Set all ISB Touching this field resets all ISB settings.
settings to The user must confirm this action. After default selecting OK all settings of the Dialogue
Box are refreshed.
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
331
THE NEXT SLATE DIALOGUE BOX
Before the NEXT SLATE Dialogue Box opens the current slate settings are uploaded from the ISB System to the
ISB Remote Control Software. Due to the limitation of the
Exposure Module, only the following characters can be used to enter names and identifications in the text fields:
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
@ ` ” ^ + – = | .
, ; :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 * !
{ [ ( / < > \ ) ] } _ ?
iPAQ Next Slate Dialogue Box
fig.8/10 numbers characters
Production 32
Slate 4
Scene 4
Next Take Id 4
Director 32
DoP 32
Roll 4
Production unit 1
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
332
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Next Take Id This field displays the Take Id for the next take. The field is refreshed every
2 sec. because the Take Id is autoincremented with every take done by the camera. The field accepts numbers in the range from 0 to 9999.
Flag: Take Normally the Take Id is auto-incre
Id was auto- mented by the ISB System after each these cases a string AI is displayed right to the Next Take Id field. After a take has been completed the Take
Id is always in this auto-incremented mode. If the user overwrites the auto-incremented Take Id using the
Next Take Id field, downloading the new Take Id by using Apply, the next take will be numbered with the user defined Take Id. The Flag AI then disappears until a new take is completed by the camera. The user defined Take Id will also be taken as a new base for auto-incrementing the Take Id.
Slate exposure The two little circle fields allow to at start or end toggle between two modes: Slate of take exposure at start of take or Slate
exposure at end of take.
Clear Clear deletes all slate settings of the
ISB System. This action has to be confirmed by the user. After clearing the settings the Dialogue Box is completely refreshed.
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
333
THE TAKELIST (LAST TAKE) INFO BOX
When the Info Box opens, the last take entry is displayed. This Info Box allows to browse through the Takelist stored in the ISB System: The ISB System adds an entry to the Take-list each time a take is completed by the ARRICAM Camera.
THE TAKELIST BROWSER INFO BOX
iPAQ Takelist Browser Info Box
fig.8/11 info fields navigation fields
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
334
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Start TC Time-code at start of take.
Frames Amount of frames within take.
Date Date at start of take.
Userbits Userbits active at start of take.
Start fps Frame rate at start of take.
Reverse Run If Reverse Run is displayed, it shows that the this take has been shot REVERSE.
Slate Slate text has been recorded at the beginning and/or end of the last take.
Scene Scene text has been recorded at the beginning and/or end of the last take.
Take Id Counted number of take.
AI When AI is displayed, the autoincrement function is active.
The info fields
Arising small flags in the square fields show actual warnings.
Remark: If the ISB is switched OFF, no slate has been exposed, so none of these flags will appear. But the ISB will continuously record the take counting and feed this information into the iPAQ.
Camera speed The frame rate was not constant during the take. The frame rate at start is displayed in the field Start fps.
Slate recording The exposure function was turned
ON (ISB switch) and the In-camera
Slate has been exposed at the beginning and/or at the end of the last take.
Slate at end If there is a Slate exposed only at the of take end of the take, the flag Slate at end of take is on.
Slate completely The In-camera Slate has been recorded correctly exposed.
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
335
The navigation fields
Use these arrow keys to navigate within the TAKELIST
BROWSER Info Box. Which take is currently displayed can be seen in the status line below the arrow keys. The first figure is the number of the actually chosen take. The second figure is the sum of recorded takes. 585 takes is the maximum capacity of the ISB memory.
Example: # 006/008 (max: 585)
The displayed data are related to the take 006 of 008 takes.
If the TAKELIST BROWSER Info Box is full and you intend to record more takes, an overflow occurs. In this case, the oldest recorded takes are deleted.
All All opens a new Info Box where the recorded takes are listed in a table called TAKELIST
TABLE.
Clear Clear deletes all take-list entries of the ISB
System and return to the Main Menu. This action has to be confirmed by the user. After clearing the settings the Info Box is completely refreshed.
TAKELIST TABLE INFO BOX
The info about each recorded take is displayed in 13 columns.
Because the TAKELIST TABLE Info Box is larger than the iPAQ screen, scrolling vertically will show all saved takes.
In scrolling horizontally, about 4 columns of 13 will be displayed simultaneously.
Move the horizontal scroll bar to leaf through the table.
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
336
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
iPAQ Takelist Table Info Box
fig.8/12
Userbits Complementary information entered in the System by the user.
Take Id The Take Identification number.
Start TC The time-code at the beginning of the shooting.
Frames Numbers of frames of this take.
Date Date of shooting.
Fps Frame rate preset at the beginning of the shooting.
Slate Slate number entered either by the user or automatically incremented by the ISB.
Scene Slate number entered by the user.
R. (Reverse) The take has been shot in REVERSE mode.
S. (Speed) Frame rate has not been constant during take.
S. (Slate) In-camera Slate exposing function was
ON.
E. (End) Slate at end of take.
C. (Complete) Slate has been correctly exposed.
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
337
USING THE TAKELIST (LAST TAKE) INFO BOX
• By touching a selected entry, the TAKELIST (LAST
TAKE) fades out and the info about this entry is displayed on the TAKELIST BROWSER Info Box.
• By touching Back the selected take fades out and info about the last recorded take is displayed on the
TAKELIST BROWSER Info Box.
• By touching Export the TAKELIST SAVE AS Info Box will appear. This Info Box enables the export of the
Take-list into an ASCII-file (on the handheld computer).
This file may be transferred to any PC using the program ”Active Sync” (part of the iPAQ package) and the serial cable (also part of this package).
THE TAKELIST SAVE AS INFO BOX
iPAQ Takelist Save As Info Box
fig.8/13
• In giving a Name to a Take-list, it will be easy to identify it later.
• In saving the Take-list into a dedicated Folder, will make the search of it easy. Selecting ”None” means
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
338
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
storing the file in the root of the ”\My Documents”
Folder.
• Select *.* if the extension of the file specified in the
Name field shall be used.
• When saving a Take-list, you may select between two saving Locations:
On iPAQ-Versions without internal flash memory: Select
”Main Memory” or ”Storage Card” if a flash card is installed.
On (newer) iPAQ-Versions with internal flash memory:
Select ”Main Memory” or ”iPAQ File Store”.
THE ERRORS/WARNINGS INFO BOX
This Info Box shows the errors and warnings generated by the ISB System. Touch the entries to display the individual error/warning text in an Info Box.
iPAQ Errors/Warnings Info Box
fig.8/14
In case of problems, the following messages can appear:
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
339
iPAQ Errors/Warnings Info Box
fig.8/15 errors
error
!
warnings
! i
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
340
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
iPAQ Error/Warning Message
fig.8/16
If a Sub-menu is active (the ERRORS/WARNINGS Info
Box excepted) and the communication is lost, an Error/
Warning Message appears and the program returns to the Main Menu.
Recovering
The program constantly trys to reestablish communications. As soon as data transfer is possible again, the program refreshes the entries in the Main Menu and processes user actions as normal.
No communication at start of program
If there is no communication at starting the program, an
Error/Warning Message is displayed and after this the
Main Menu appears with all entries set to <void>.
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
341
8 – THE IN-CAMERA SLATE BOX
342
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
THE ARRICAM CAMERA SUPPORTS
The Camera Supports
This chapter is dedicated to the various accessories which make the handling of the ARRICAM Cameras safe and comfortable.
Preliminary remarks
All parts of the ARRICAM Camera Support System
should be handled with the same care as the camera
bodies themselves.
When mounting the different handles, be sure that
they fit firmly but do not use unnecessary force.
• Use an 8 -10 mm (5/16”) flathead long shaft screwdriver for mounting/removing the Power
Bridgeplate, the Baseplate, the Riser Baseplate or the Magazine Stabilization Bracket.
• Use a 5 mm metric hex wrench for mounting/ removing parts of the Carrying Handle’s System, e.g. a Handle or an Accessory Shoe.
• Use a 3 mm metric hex wrench for mounting/ removing all support components on/from the cameras.
Notice
Even though the Carrying Handles provide 3/8’’ threaded holes, no heavy items should be attached there.
CARRYING HANDLES
Standard Carrying Handles
Each camera type has its own, none interchangeable
”standard” Carrying Handle. The Studio Camera Handle as well as that of the Lite are fixed to the camera right side by means of 3 mm hex screws.
9 – THE CAMERA SUPPORTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
345
• Studio Camera Handle
The front and the rear Handle can be removed and fixed in other positions on the Attachment Cubes. To do so, enter a long 5 mm metric hex wrench in the opening of the Handle to unscrew/screw the bolt.
The Studio Camera Handle is fixed to the camera body with three 3 mm hex screws. By putting the metric hex wrench in the access holes of the Studio
Video Assist, mounting or removing of the Studio
Camera Handle on/from the Studio is possible.
Studio Camera Handle mounting
fig.9/1
Attachment cubes
Access hole
Mounting screws
• Lite Camera Handle
Besides being secured by two retaining screws, the
Lite Camera Handle also slides into a holder on the
Lite top. The two knobs loosen rosettes enabling the optimization of the carrying balance by positioning the Handle over the centre line of the camera.
9 – THE CAMERA SUPPORTS
346
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Lite Camera Handle mounting
fig.9/2
Carrying handle holder
Mounting screws
Centre Carrying Handles
Because both cameras can be configured in several ways, some configurations will not allow using the
”standard” Handles but require other ones.
• Lite Centre Handle
When the Studio Viewfinder or the Studio100%
Video Top equipped with its Video Assist is mounted on the Lite, only the Lite Centre Handle can be used.
This Centre Handle is mounted on top of the Lite body.
LITE Centre Handle mounting
fig.9/3
Mounting screws
9 – THE CAMERA SUPPORTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
347
• Studio Centre Handle
When the Lite Viewfinder or the Lite100% Video Top equipped with its Video Assist is mounted on the Studio, the Back Load Adapter must be used without its own Handle. See chapter 2 page 94 how to remove the Magazine Adapter’s Handle. The Studio Centre
Handle should then be fixed on both sides of the
Studio’s body as well as on the Magazine Adapter.
ACCESSORY SHOE and SHOE EXPANDER
Attachment Cubes with 3/8” threaded holes are integrated in the Carrying Handles. Either Handles or little spare Accessory Shoes can be mounted there by means of a 5 mm metric hex wrench.
To double the possibility of mounting accessories on a shoe, a Shoe Expander can be slid into the shoes provided on the Frameglows, Studio Readout and other components.
Studio – Accessory Shoe mounting/Shoe Expander
fig.9/4
9 – THE CAMERA SUPPORTS
348
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
POWER BRIDGEPLATE
Specially conceived for both ARRICAM Cameras, this baseplate for 19 mm Support Rods is equipped with two 24 V dc outlets. On the base of both camera bodies, a cover plate can be slid away to enable the contacts of the ARRICAM Power Bridgeplate to receive power supply via the camera e.g. battery.
Studio – Camera Base
fig.9/5
Power Bridgeplate mounting
fig.9/6
9 – THE CAMERA SUPPORTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
349
Caution!
1. Even though the two 24 V outlets look similar to the camera’s RS connectors, no remote switch can be plugged there because the
RUN/STOP functionality is not supported.
2. The power delivered by the two connectors has the same voltage as the power supply source (Battery or mains Power Supply Unit).
Because the total power supplied by the connectors is limited by self resetting fuses, be careful that too many accessories are not connected to the camera simultaneously. In case a problem occurs, e.g. a short circuit caused by a defective accessory, the self resetting fuse will stop the power to the connectors. In this case, see chapter 10 – Power Management, page 362.
The ARRICAM Power Bridgeplate allows filming in the
Standard 35 or Super 35 formats.
The current position, STANDARD or SUPER 35, is displayed by two index arrows on the integrated Compensation Bar. The Power Bridgeplate can be converted to
Super 35 as follows:
Power Bridgeplate mounting
fig.9/7
Integrated compensation bar
9 – THE CAMERA SUPPORTS
350
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Power Bridgeplate
fig.9/8
Power contact pins
24 V dc
outlet integrated
Iompensation bar
Lock lever
1. Remove the three screws with a Phillips screwdriver
No 2.
2. Turn the integrated Compensation Bar 180° and screw tightly in this position.
Caution!
It is crucial to check if the setting of the integrated
Compensation Bar corresponds with the format set on the camera (e.g. SUPER 35).
Notice
The ARRICAM Power Bridgeplate cannot be used with other cameras but many other ARRI Baseplates can be used with ARRICAM Cameras.
CAMERA HANDGRIPS
In order to operate the ARRICAM Cameras from the shoulder, the operator can choose between two options:
• to take the camera on the shoulder and to hold it by means of a camera handgrip attached to the camera own rosette joint on the right side.
• to use the Shoulder Set and to hold the camera with
9 – THE CAMERA SUPPORTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
351
both hands. Two handgrips which are mounted on the little Riser Plate, can be adjusted in all directions.
Remote RUN switch
The camera Right Handgrip as well as the Shoulder
Set’s Right Handgrip are equipped with a RUN button and a cable that should be plugged into the RS connector located next to the rosette attachment.
Notice
• Do not plug the handgrip cable in an RS connector on the Power Bridgeplate because no RUN functionality is provided there!
• The camera can be switched to RUN or STOP by any one of several buttons, for example on the
Handgrip, on the Camera Control Panel, on the
Speed Control Box or on a remote control device.
In order to avoid confusion it is recommended to assign only one person to switch the camera ON or OFF.
Lite – Right Handgrip
fig.9/9
Shoulder Pad
9 – THE CAMERA SUPPORTS
352
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
SHOULDER SET
The ARRICAM Shoulder Set – which can be fitted to the bases of the Studio and Lite – allows comfortable handling with two Handgrips while the camera rests on a Shoulder Pad.
The Shoulder Set consists of four parts:
• When fitted on a camera base, the lightweight Riser
Plate allows changing from shoulder operation to head operation instantly. This is possible because the
Riser Plate holds either the lens Support Rods (incl.
Motor(s) and Matte Box) as well as both Handgrips without hindering the quick mounting/releasing on/ from most camera heads. Even though the short camera baseplate is called Riser Plate, it doesn’t affect the centre of gravity of the camera when it is operated on the shoulder. While using the Riser Plate on a head, the camera centre of gravity will be about 2 cm higher than when the camera is mounted on the Power
Bridgeplate. This fact is negligible when thinking of all the advantages offered by a fast operation.
Shoulder Set
fig.9/10
9 – THE CAMERA SUPPORTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
353
On the top of the Baseplate, two 3/8” bolts provide a firm fixing for the camera. Underneath the Riser Plate is a removable snap plate which fits in the quick-release attachment of the ARRI Gearheads and some fluid heads. This ARRI Quick-Release Plate can be exchanged with an alternative one if another camera head is used.
Use a Philips No. 2 screwdriver to exchange the Quick-
Release Plate. Two 19 mm Support Rods – the lightweight carbon fibre ones are recommended for hand held operation – can be fixed on the Riser Baseplate.
Use a 8 - 10 mm (5/16”) flathead long shaft screwdriver to fit the Riser Plate to the camera base – short screwdrivers will not allow the fixing. When mounting the Riser Plate, be sure that the sliding cover plate on the camera bottom side is closed.
• The Shoulder Pad attaches to the camera base with a butterfly bolt. It can be used on both cameras but will not fit on the Lite when the Steadicam Magazine is used.
• The two Handgrips are screwed onto the rosette attachments. Rosette joints enable optimizing individually the ergonomics of the Shoulder Set.
Shoulder Set mounting
fig.9/11
9 – THE CAMERA SUPPORTS
354
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Caution!
Because of the width of some heads, one or the two Handgrips cannot be fixed below a certain
angle.
THE LENS SUPPORTS
When using heavy lenses (e.g. Variable Primes, Zooms or Long Focal Lenses, it is essential you use adequate lens supports. ARRI provides several lens Support Bridges as well as different length rods.
THE ACCESSORY HOLDERS
Two brackets – one to be mounted on a Ø19 mm
Support Rod and the other on a rosette e.g. on the
ARRIHEAD – enable the flexible positioning of all accessories fitted with the ARRI quick release dovetail mechanism, e.g. the Wired Handgrip Attachment WHA-2.
Furthermore, two attachments to extend the possibilities of using the well established ARRI Dovetail System are available – the Dovetail Rod Clamp and the Dovetail
3/8“ Clamp.
ARRI Dovetail System
fig.9/12
3/8“ clamp
Rod clamp
Accessory shoe
9 – THE CAMERA SUPPORTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
355
THE UNIVERSAL LOW MODE SET
The Universal Low Mode Set allows the Studio or the
Lite to be underslung on a Steadicam or other camera support device. The Universal Low Mode Set is compatible with all ARRICAM Viewfinders, both Video Assists and both 100% Video Tops. The set consists of an Lite
Mounting Plate, a Steadicam Plate, two Support Arms and a Support Rod Holder. This Holder slides into a dovetail located on the front of both 100% Video Tops.
Use the 3 mm metric hex wrench to fix both Support
Arms to the threaded holes on the left and right side of the Studio body.
On the Lite, you have first to attach the Lite Mounting
Plate on top of the camera body before fixing the Support Arms to it.
Then the Steadicam Plate will be fixed by four 3 mm screws to the top of the Support Arms.
To allow flexible mounting options, the Steadicam Plate has 21 3/8” x 16 threaded holes, of which 9 are countersunk. This Plate can also be used as an Adapter
Plate when an ARRICAM Camera is mounted in high mode on a Steadicam.
Lite Mounting Plate
fig.9/13
Mounting screws
9 – THE CAMERA SUPPORTS
356
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Studio – Universal Low Mode Set
fig.9/14
Mounting screws
Mounting screws
Studio – Universal Low Mode Set
fig.9/15
Mounting screws
Mounting screws
9 – THE CAMERA SUPPORTS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
357
The Support Rod Holder allows the use of lens motors and other rod mounted accessories, without the need for fitting a bridgeplate. It is provided with two 19 mm and two 15 mm removable Rods must be adjusted accordingly to the type of camera used. The Support Rod
Holder has to be fixed by one 3 mm hex screw in the correct position: Studio or Lite.
Lite – Support Rod Holder
fig.9/16
Support rod holder
3 mm hex screw
9 – THE CAMERA SUPPORTS
358
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
ARRICAM POWER MANAGEMENT
Power Management
ARRICAM, the most sophisticated contemporary camera system, is driven by several electronic components which carry out very precise and defined tasks.
In order to use the system efficiently, the users should have some knowledge about the power supply, the power distribution and consumption as well as about the security components of this modular camera system.
POWER SUPPLY
The ARRICAM System should be powered by a power source providing a nominal 24 V dc. An incorporated electronic device should filter the supplied energy and compensate for deviations. An acceptable voltage range is from 21 V dc and max. 35 V dc.
Caution!
No power sources (Battery or mains Power Supply Unit) providing less than 21 V dc or more than max. 35 V dc should be used at any time!
BATTERIES
At the moment, beside current developments in the field of portable power supply, e.g. Metal Hybrid battery technology, the user can choose between three types of batteries to power the ARRICAM System: the Lead Acid, the Nickel-Cadmium and the Lithium-Ion type.
The Lead Acid battery has disadvantages in being the heaviest battery type in relation to the delivered power, causing environmental problems and being quite inefficient in cold temperature.
Being lighter than the Lead battery, the well established
10 – THE POWER MANAGEMENT
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
361
Nickel Cadmium battery Type ARRI NC24/7R delivers
24 V dc with a 7 Ah capacity.
Depending on the ambient temperature and on the consumption of the equipment, the capacity of NiCad batteries is limited to a certain period of time. When the remaining capacity starts to decrease, the voltage will also slowly decrease. This allows the ARRICAM Electronics to warn the user “L BAT” when the supplied voltage drops below a threshold value, e.g. 20.6 V preset in the factory. One of the disadvantages of the NiCad technology is supposedly the memory effect: Depending on the charge/discharge cycles, the NiCad battery will
”remember” its last charge level and will limit its delivery to this stage.
The newer Metal Hybrid battery technology should offer the advantage over the NiCad of less memory effect.
The Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) camera battery is a rechargeable battery with twice the energy capacity of a Nickel-Cadmium battery for a given size and weight. The battery is composed of Lithium, the lightest metal and the metal that has the highest electrochemical potential. The Li-
Ion battery uses Lithium metallic oxide in its positive electrode (anode) and Carbon material in its negative electrode (cathode), and the Lithium Ions inside the battery transfer between the positive electrode and the negative electrode during charge or discharge. Lithium, however, is an unstable metal, so Lithium-Ion batteries are made with Lithium ions from chemical compounds.
Because of its lightness and high energy density, Lithium-
Ion batteries are ideal for portable devices, such as the
ARRICAM System. In addition, Lithium-Ion batteries have no memory effect and do not use poisonous metals, such as Lead, Mercury or Cadmium.
10 – THE POWER MANAGEMENT
362
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Features
• Voltage of 28.8 V dc/10 Ah lets you cut down on the number of batteries you use.
• High energy density minimizes battery size and weight, making it perfect for use in portable equipment.
• No metallic Lithium is used, so charging and discharging are very safe.
• No memory accumulation, so it provides a full discharge every time.
• The outer casing is an Aluminium alloy, so overall battery weight is lower.
Lithium-Ion batteries have also disadvantages:
1. they are currently more expensive than NiCad and
NiMH battery packs.
2. because of their own built in electronics, a Li-Ion battery pack will automatically stop supplying power if the voltage drops below a value preset by the manufacturer. Depending on the ambient temperature, the way it is charged and on the consumption of the equipment, the time of stopping the power supply will differ from pack to pack.
Consequently, the ARRICAM Electronics must be adjusted to be able to warn the user by displaying
“L BAT” in time. To do this, the user or the rental house will have to go to the Option mode – see chapter 1, page 32 to preset a threshold value based on his/her experience with the delivered Li-Ion battery pack. Certainly, this is a kind of compromise to solve the problem that occurs when using ”intelligent” batteries.
10 – THE POWER MANAGEMENT
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
363
CONCLUSION
• If the lightness and the higher capacity (more footage can be exposed with one battery pack) is your choice, take LI-Ion batteries on the set.
• If, on the one hand, weight is not a big problem and on the other, you prefer to be warned as usual, it is recommended to use a Metal Hybrid battery or the
NiCad pack to operate the ARRICAM System.
POWER SUPPLY UNIT (Mains Adapter)
If power from the mains (115-120 V/60 Hz or 220-
240 V/50 Hz) is available and running a cable to the camera is not a problem, you should opt for using the
Power Supply Unit. The ARRI Power Supply NG 12/26
R delivers sufficient power with a stabilized voltage of
26 volts.
POWER CONNECTOR
The Fischer power supply connector of the LITE and
STUDIO are identical with the one established on the
ARRI 435 and 535. (Pin 1 is –, Pin 2 is +).
POWER SUPPLY CABLE
The power supply cable is connected between the power connector on the camera and the power source.
Don’t use cables longer than you actually need. If you have to use a longer cable, e.g. when the camera is mounted on a remote head, make sure the voltage at the camera end is sufficient. This is more of a problem for a high speed camera like the ARRI 435. Ask your equipment supplier for a long cable that is adequate for the job.
10 – THE POWER MANAGEMENT
364
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Caution!
The battery end of the cable uses a 3-pin XLR plug wired Pin 1 -ve and Pin 2 +ve. Please be aware that there are other systems in the Film Industry that use this connector but with the polarity reversed.
Make sure you do not mix the systems, as the consequences for the equipment are potentially disasterous.
POWER DISTRIBUTION
Several components and all connectors of the cameras are protected by self resetting fuses built into the camera bodies. The total current provided by all the connectors together is limited to 7 A.
Components which need only 12 V dc – e.g. parts of the Video System – are powered by an internal, galvanic separated, power supply. More 12 V outlets can be provided by using the Accessory Power Box (see next chapter). Several connectors marked RS (Pin 1:
GND, Pin 2: nominal 24 V dc out) are located on the two camera bodies.
These connectors supply 24 V dc for accessories or can be used to alter the camera status between RUN and
STOP, e.g. for handgrip or for remote control. Last but not least, two 24 V dc outlets (special Lemo connectors, outer: GND, inner: nominal 24 V dc out) are located on both cameras to connect the Work Light as well as the Heated Eyecup. The requested power for remote operating e.g. the Lens Data Display or the Speed Control Box is supplied by the CAC connectors located at the rear of the cameras.
Besides the power outlets on the camera bodies, power connectors are located on further ARRICAM System components. Some of these connectors are exclusively
10 – THE POWER MANAGEMENT
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
365
dedicated to the powering and controlling of some
ARRICAM Accessories:
• On the Power Bridgeplate, two connectors marked
V-BAT enable the connection of 24 V dc accessories but do not include the RUN/ STOP command (Pin
1: GND, Pin 2: nominal 24 V dc out). The outgoing voltage is equal to the one provided by the Battery or mains Power Supply Unit which supplies the camera.
• On the Lens Data Boxes, three outlets marked
FOCUS, ZOOM and IRIS, supply power and control signals for three ARRI CLM -2 motors.
Caution!
No other motor type than the CLM-2 must be connected there.
• To power and control ARRI CLM-1 motors, you have to connect them to one of the two connectors, labelled
LCS, located on the Lens Data Box. Further remote control devices of the Lens Control System must, if not used wireless, also be connected to these LCS plugs.
• On each ARRICAM Video Assist, a little outlet marked
MINI MONITOR is provided to connect one of the two ARRICAM On Board Monitors (2” and 6.6”).
• On the Readout Unit as well as on the LT Frameglow
Module, power/signal supplying connectors for the
Lens Data Display are provided.
The ARRICAM Bodies protect themselves against an excessive power consumption of components with selfresetting electronic fuses. No other fuses are provided on the ARRICAM System.
10 – THE POWER MANAGEMENT
366
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
In case an attached device is defective (short circuit etc.), the automatic multifuse cuts OFF the power supply to the connector. To reactivate the multifuse, remove the component that caused the problem and disconnect the camera from the power source (Battery or mains Power
Supply Unit). Wait about 5 sec. before trying again. If the attached device causes trouble again when switched
ON, do not use this item until it has been checked at a
ARRICAM Maintenance Centre!
MONITORING THE POWER SUPPLY
When a battery is attached to the camera and the
MAIN switch is ON, you should see characters appearing on the Camera Control Panel displays.
When the camera is STANDBY and the PHASE button is pressed, the INCHING status is activated and the movement will RUN at 1 fps as long as the button is held down. While the camera is INCHING the actual battery voltage (under load) will be displayed in the FPS display as e.g.
V24.6
.
If the capacity of the battery and so the voltage falls under a critical level, no Bat warning on the camera is possible. To alert about this status all displays as well as the video On Board Monitor will start blinking. By the way, the same alert occurs if illegal connection of components are made on the camera.
Notice
This figure will tell you the voltage but not the capacity of the battery. Because of the characteristics of a
Li-Ion battery, you may assume that if more than 22 V are displayed, the battery capacity would be ok for the next shooting.
10 – THE POWER MANAGEMENT
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
367
Because many parameters will influence the power consumption of the camera system as well as the capacity of the batteries, it is not possible to give here exact information about the footage that can be exposed with one battery – even fully charged.
Therefore, each focus puller will have to learn how to manage the power supply based on his/her experience with the available equipment and atmospheric
working conditions.
ADVICE
In order to avoid changing the Battery too often, only mount the components needed for the actual shooting on the camera. All ARRICAM System components have been designed to consume as little power as possible.
However, screens like the Lens Data Display or the
Video On Board Monitor needs some power, it would do fine to turn them OFF when not used.
The Lens Data Display automatically falls into ”sleep” mode when it is not used – the LDD after about five minutes, the smaller LDD-FP after about 2 min. As soon as something changes, e.g. the camera status changes to
RUN, the lens setting is changed or a warning message should be displayed, it will ”wake up” automatically.
Also shooting in cold atmospheric condition will require more power because the internal heaters of the camera will turn on automatically. Furthermore the Heated
Eyecup will often be turned ON. So please be aware to have enough spare batteries with you if no Power
Supply Unit can be used.
In any case, we recommend to use a Heated Barney
(with spare chemical warmers) in cold conditions.
10 – THE POWER MANAGEMENT
368
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
MISCELLANEOUS
Standard 35/Super 35
Conversion
Even though we strongly recommend you mention the desired format (35/S35) when placing your order with a rental house or ask an ARRICAM Maintenance Centre to perform the conversion, we describe here briefly the operation, should it be neccessary to do it yourself.
For shooting in Super 35, the lens port, the Viewfinder
Mounting Plate, the Aperture AperturE Format Mask, the
Frameglow Module Mask, the Ground Glass and the integrated Compensation Bar of the Power Bridgeplate or Baseplate must be altered for the format. This ensures that the lenses and accessories are exactly aligned for the optical centre of Super 35.
CONVERTING THE LENS PORT TO SUPER 35
See chapter 1 – page 18, fig. 1/1 and 1/2.
For shooting in Super 35, the lens port must be turned
180°.
• Remove the six cylindrical screws.
• Unscrew both locking grips.
• Turn the lens port so that the number ”2” is positioned next to the marking.
• Unscrew the index pin and screw it into the opposite inner thread.
• Screw both locking grips firmly into the correct operating position.
• Replace the six cylindrical screws and screw tightly.
• Check the flange focal distance.
11 – MISCELLANEOUS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
371
EXCHANGING THE VIEWFINDER MOUNTING PLATE
All ARRICAM Viewfinders and 100% Video Tops can be used for shooting in both formats – Standard 35 and
Super 35.
To align the Viewfinder to the Super 35 centre, the apropriate Mounting Plate must be installed. To do so, use a
2 mm metric hex wrench to unscrew the plate showing the STANDARD engraving and replace it by the one showing SUPER 35. When fixing the plate, be sure that it fits flush with the camera body – see chapter 1, page
57, fig. 1/19.
EXCHANGING THE APERTURE FORMAT MASK, THE
GROUND GLASS AND THE FRAMEGLOW MASK
For instructions on inserting Aperture AperturE Format
Masks into the Film Gate for Super 35, see chapter 1, page 64, camera interiors.
Regarding the Ground Glass and the illuminated Format
Markings for this format, see chapter 4, page 152 and
158.
CONVERTING THE POWER BRIDGEPLATE TO SUPER 35
See chapter 9 – Camera Supports
3 Perforation/4 Perforation
Conversion
Both Studio and Lite are available in 3 or 4 perforation, however it is not a conversion that can be performed in the field. The changing of the movement can only be performed in an ARRICAM Maintenance Centre.
The Work Light
After loosening the mounting screw, slide the Work
Light foot into one of the several Accessory Shoes and tighten the screw. Switch OFF the camera on the MAIN switch, then connect the short coiled cable (similar to the
Heated Eyecup) to one of the two dedicated connectors located on the left side of the STUDIO and on the front of the LITE. The Work Light is switched ON by turning its cap.
It is prudent to have spare bulbs – 24 V/4 W – with you.
Heated Eyecup and Work Light may be used together
(but keep an eye on your battery!).
Studio – Work Light mounting fig.11/1
ON/OFF switch
Mounting screw
Connectors
11 – MISCELLANEOUS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
373
Checking the Mirror Shutter manually
It is necessary to rotate the mirror shutter out of the way before either checking/cleaning the Film Gate from the camera front or checking/cleaning/changing the
Ground Glass/the Fieldlens. When the camera is powered, briefly push the DUST CHECK button and the mirror will be rotated out of the way while the shutter opens to 180° if previously set to a smaller angle. Because viewing through the Viewfinder is now not possible, DC appears on the FPS display(s). By pushing the DUST
CHECK button again, the shutter will return to the preset opening and the mirror will go to the viewing position.
Sometimes, it is also reassuring to check that the mechanical reality corresponds with the electronically displayed shutter opening. Therefore, several important angles are also labelled on the shutter blade itself. It is obvious that 180° is not labelled.
Notice
Like all other operations done when the lens cavity is open, also this one should be carried out in a sheltered place where there is no risk of dust getting into the camera.
1. Connect the camera to a power supply and set the camera MAIN switch to ON.
2. Take lens or lens cavity cover off the port.
3. If an In-camera Slate Box is connected, set its switch to OFF.
4. Check the preset shutter angle value shown on the
SHUTTER display(s).
11 – MISCELLANEOUS
374
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
5. Briefly press the PHASE button on the Camera
Control Panel. Now the mirror is turned out of the way but the shutter opening has not changed.
6. Switch the camera MAIN switch OFF .
7. By means of a clean toothpick, carefully rotate the mirror shutter manually clockwise until the short white index line at the bottom side of the shutter appears.
8. Because the labelling is painted with a quite dark magenta colour on the black shutter blade, use a torch to see if the painted shutter angle lined up with the index line corresponds with the electronically preset shutter opening.
9. Switch the camera MAIN switch ON and push the
PHASE button for 2 sec. in order to turn the mirror into viewing position again.
Caution!
Never touch the mirror with any object or with fingers!
If you doubt that the opening angle corresponds with the displayed figure, consult an ARRICAM Maintenance
Centre.
Camera Lens Port/Mirror Shutter fig.11/2
11 – MISCELLANEOUS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
375
Wired Handgrip Attachment
The Wired Handgrip Attachment (WHA-2 & WHA-3) is provided to allow the Wireless Lens Control components to be connected directly to the camera by means of cables, making it ideal for situations where the use of a Wireless Lens Control system is either uneccessary or impractical. It is paticulary useful because it will interface with the Remote Control Station as well as directly with the camera and, as well as the Wireless Lens Control units, accepts the Wireless Remote Control unit.
MOUNTING AND CONNECTING THE WHA-2
• The remote control units clip onto the WHA-2.
• The WHA-2 itself can be mounted with an ARRI
Dovetail Shoe to several ARRI Dovetail Support Parts like the 3/8” Clamp, the Rod Clamp and the Rosette
Clamp.
The WHA-2 can be connected with the following ARRI
Cables:
• LC-M1-SP-S or LC-Z1-S either to a Lens Data Box (LCS connector), to a CLM-1 motor which is connected to the Lens Data Box or to the Remote Control Station
(WHA-2 connector),
• KC 70-S either to the Camera Accessory Connector
(CAC) on the camera or to the CAC Distribution Box,
Up to two may be connected simultaneously to either the Studio or Lite, one into an LCS port of the Lens Data
Box and one into the camera’s CAC connector.
11 – MISCELLANEOUS
376
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
It may also be used as one of the components that connects with the Remote Control Station.
Notice
•The LCS connector of the Lens Data Diplay will not work with the Wired Handgrip Attachment.
•The WHA-3 differs from the WHA-2 only in that it has an extra button to activate the Focus Tracking feature of the LDD-FP.
•When using two Wireless Focus/Iris Units (WFU-1) together, it is best to have the two knob/slider selection switches in opposite positions otherwise working out working out who’s knob/slider has control of which lens axis becomes a complex business.
RUN button
RELEASE button
Lens
calibration button
Wireless Focus/
Iris Unit (WFU-1)
Lens
calibration
LED
Dovetail
Shoe
Wired Handgrip
Attachment (WHA-2)
WHA-2 connector
11 – MISCELLANEOUS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
377
Accessory Power Box
The Accessory Power Box provides three extra 24 V and two 12 Vpower outlets for accessories plus a RUN button.
Power input connector (24 V)
24 V dc outlets
24 V short circuit/ overload LED
Mounting screw
RUN button
BAT LED
RUN LED Mounting screw 12 V dc outlets
12 V overload
LED
MOUNTING AND POWERING THE ACCESSORY
POWER BOX (APB)
There are a number of options available when mounting and powerthe Accessory Power Box:
1. MOUNTED ON AND POWERED BY THE CAMERA.
The Accessory Power Box attaches directly onto the
Studio instead of the In-camera Slate Box and so cannot be used with it simultaneously. The APB attaches to the
Lite only via the Lens Data Box and agian, cannot be used in conjunction with the In-camera Slate Box.
In this configuration, the Accessory Power Box draws its power from the camera electronics and, although this is the neatest arrangement, the amount of power the APB can deliver in this mode is limited.
•Total power output is 70 watts. e.g. The 24 V outlets can deliver 3 amps between them in total. If the 12 V
11 – MISCELLANEOUS
378
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
outlets are used, they can deliver 3 amps, leaving only
1.5 amps for the 24 V outlets. (Power = Volts x Amps)
•The APB’s BAT light glows red when the camera shows its low battery warning.
•The APB’s RUN button and RUN light function.
2. MOUNTED ON THE CAMERA, POWERED EXTERNALLY.
With this method the Accessory Power Box mounts in the same way as the first example and so has communication with the camera. The difference is that power is fed into the APB’s power connector either from a seperate battery of from the camera battery via a Y-cable
(KC-62-S). This enables the APB to output considerably more power.
•Total power output is 250 watts approx. e.g. Each 24
V outlet can supply 3 A continuously, 5 A peak. (24 V is unregulated, so is actually supply voltage). Each 12 V outlet can supply 1.5 A continuously.
•The BAT light glows red when the battery connected to the APB falls below the Low Battery threashold set in the camera.
•The APB’s RUN button and RUN light function.
3. MOUNTED ANYWHERE, POWERED EXTERNALLY
The Accessory Power Box Cover is equipped with a 3/
8 threaded hole which allows it to be mounted with the
ARRI Dovetail system. Therefore it can be placed almost anywhere on or around the camer (which does not even have to be an ARRICAM).
•Total power output is 250 watts approx. (see above).
•The BAT light glows red when the power source falls below 20.5 volts.
•The RUN button and RUN light do not function.
11 – MISCELLANEOUS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
379
Tools
In addition to the usual tools and cleaning materials, the camera assistant only needs a few specific tools to work with the ARRICAM System. Except the ARRICAM
Combi Tools and the ARRI A 16SR 3 twin-pronged driver, all tools can be purchased in regular hardware shops. Most rental houses or an ARRI Dealer will be able to provide you with the ARRICAM Users’ Tool Kit, the Combi Tools and the twin-pronged driver which can also be ordered separately.
1. A 8 -10 mm (5/16”) flathead long shaft screwdriver e.g. Facom Agt. 10 x 100 is used to attach the
Baseplate, the Magazine Stabilization Bracket and the Shoulder Set.
Notice
Please note that screwdrivers with a short, stubby shaft cannot be used to mount the Shoulder Set base.
2. A 2 mm (1/12”) flathead screwdriver is used to open the Mask Frameglow in order to access to the
Mask.
3. With a 5 mm x 150 mm metric hex wrench you will be able to attach or remove the Handles and the
Accessory Shoes to/from the Carrying Handles.
4. With a 3 mm metric hex wrench you will be able to attach or remove most of the Accessories and Boxes to or from the camera.
5. With a 2 mm metric hex wrench you will be able to adjust the friction of the Studio door hinge. Furthermore, the tension of all swivelling Viewfinder Arms, except the one of the hinge type Studio Viewfinder, can be adjusted with this tool.
6. With a 1.5 mm metric hex wrench you will be
11 – MISCELLANEOUS
380
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
able to adjust the Video Assist chip and the Mask
Frameglow alignment, however it is best to leave this very accurate work to the experts of ARRICAM
Maintenance Centre.
7. The ARRI A 16SR-3 twin-pronged driver – part No.
K5.26129.0 – will be used for adjusting the swingover tension of all swivelling Viewfinder Arms except the hinge type Studio Viewfinder.
8. Two types of ARRICAM Combi Tool are provided:
A) The first one – part No. K4.52685.0 – is a dual headed Ground Glass/Fieldlens tool with a 2.5 mm thread on one end a 3 mm thread on the other. The Ground Glass and Frameglow Mask (3 mm threaded hole) and the Fieldlens (originally a
2,5 mm but now a 3 mm threaded hole) can be pulled out of the camera cavities for exchange or cleaning purposes.
B) The second one – part No. K4.52722.0 – has a 3 mm thread on one end and a 1,5 mm metric hex wrench on the other.
11 – MISCELLANEOUS
11/2003 ARRICAM System Users’ Guide
381
User’s Tool Kit fig.11/3
8-10 mm (5/16”) flathead long shaft screwdriver
2 mm (1/12”) flathead screwdriver
5mm metric hex wrench
3mm metric hex wrench)
2mm metric hex wrench
1.5mm metric hex wrench
ARRI A 16SR 3 twin-pronged driver
ARRICAM – 2.5 mm/3 mm Combi Tool
ARRICAM – 1.5mm metric hex wrench/3 mm Combi Tool
11 – MISCELLANEOUS
382
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
APPENDIX
ARRICAM SYSTEM – TECHNICAL DATA
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
TECHNICAL DATA ARRICAM STUDIO ARRICAM LITE
Film format 35 mm DIN 15501 35 mm DIN 15501
Lens port convertible 35/S35 format 54 mm PL 54 mm PL
Flange focal distance 51.98 mm- 0.01 51.98 mm- 0.01
Lens contacts for LDS Lenses yes yes
Forward run 1-60 fps 1-40 fps
Reverse run with Studio Magazines and SCB 1-32 fps 1-32 fps
Noise level below 20 dB/A below 24 dB/A
Temperature range -10° to +40°C / 14° to 104° F -10° to +40°C/14° to 104° F
Reflex mirror shutter, electronically adjustable while running 11.2° to 180° 11.2° to 180°
Power supply 24V dc - 32V dc 24V dc - 32V dc
Camera body with Viewfinder 8.15 kg/17.95 lbs. 5.25 kg/11.56 lbs.
Studio Magazine 300/1000 5.2 kg/11.46 lbs. 5.2 kg/11.46 lbs.
Studio Magazine 120/400 3.3 kg/7.26 lbs. 3.3 kg/7.26 lbs.
Lite Shoulder Magazine 2.7 kg/5.95 lbs. 2.7 kg/5.95 lbs.
Lite Steadicam Magazine 2.7 kg/5.95 lbs. 2.7 kg/5.95 lbs.
ARRICAM ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
AGC Automatic Gain Control (Video Assist)
ATC Automatic Time-code
CAC Camera Accessory Connector
CCB Camera Control Box
CLM-1 Controlled Lens Motor (connected to LCS plug on LDB)
CLM-2 Controlled Lens Motor (connected to focus, zoom or iris plug on LDB)
ICU Iris Control Unit
ISB In-camera Slate Box
IVS Integrated Video System (Video Assist)
KC Camera Cable Nr.
LCS Lens Contol System
LDB Lens Data Box
LDD Lens Data Display
LDD-FP Lens Data Display – Focus Puller
LDS Lens Data System
LT ARRICAM Lite/Lite Accessory
LT-VF Lite Viewfinder
MCB Manual Control Box
MGC Manual Gain Control (Video Assist)
OCR Optical Character Recognition Software (ARRI)
OSD On Screen Display (Video Assist, Video Monitor,ect.)
RCS Remote Control Station (Plate + MCB Holder)
RS RUN/STOP (button, connector)
SAC Speed Control Box Accessory Connector
SCB Speed Control Box
ST ARRICAM Studio/Studio Accessory
ST-VF Studio Viewfinder
TC Time-code
TLA-2 Top Load Adapter 2 (now Dual Port Adapter)
TSB Timing Shift Box
UB Userbits (TC, slate information)
ULT-VF Lite Universal Viewfinder
UST-VF Studio Universal Viewfinder
VITC Vertical Interval Time-code
WFU Wireless Focus/Iris Unit
WHA-2 Wired Handgrip Attachment
WMU Wireless Main Unit (transmitter)
WRC Wireless Remote Control
WZU Wireless Zoom Unit
ARRI GROUP ADDRESSES
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
Canada ARRI Canada Limited
415 Horner Ave. Unit 11, Toronto, Ontario M8W 4W3, Canada
Voice phone: +416 255 3335, FAX: +416 255 3399
Email: [email protected]
Germany Arnold & Richter Cine Technik
Türkenstraße 89, D-80799 Munich, Germany
Voice phone: +49 (0)89 3809-0, FAX: +49 (0)89 3809-1244
Email: [email protected]
ARRI Camera Rental (Film Equipment Rental Germany)
Türkenstraße 89, D-80799 Munich, Germany
Voice phone: +49 (0)89 3809-1240, FAX: +49 (0)89 3809-1798
Email: [email protected]
Great Britain ARRI GB Limited – Sales & Service
2 Highbridge, Oxford Road, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB8 1LX, England
Voice phone: +44 (0)1895 457 000, FAX: +44 (0)1895 457 001
Email: [email protected]
ARRI MEDIA (Camera Rental, UK)
3 Highbridge, Oxford Road, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB8 1LX, England
Voice phone: +44 (0)1895 457 100, FAX: +44 (0)1895 457 101
Email: [email protected]
ARRI Lighting Rental (Lighting Rental, UK)
4 Highbridge, Oxford Road, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB8 1LX, England
Voice phone: +44 (0)1895 457 200, FAX: +44 (0)1895 457 201
Email: [email protected]
Italy ARRI Italia S.r.l., Head Office (Milan)
Viale Edison 318, 20099 Sesto San Giovanni (Milan), Italy
Voice phone: +39 (0)2 262 271 75, FAX: +39 (0)2 242 1692
Email: [email protected]
ARRI Italia S.r.l., Rome
Via Placanica 95, 00040 Morena (Rome), Italy
Voice phone: +39 (0)6 726 707 97, FAX: +39 (0)6 723 1541
USA ARRI USA Inc. – East Coast
617 Route 303, Blauvelt, NY 10913-1123, USA
Voice phone: +1 914 353 1400, FAX: +1 914 425 1250
Email: [email protected]
ARRI USA Inc. – West Coast (Burbank Office)
600 North Victory Blvd., Burbank, CA 91502-1639, USA
Voice phone: +1 818 841 7070, FAX: +1 818 848 4028
Email: [email protected]
CSC Camera Service Center – Film Equipment Rental – NY, USA
619 West 54th St, New York, NY 10019, USA
Voice phone: +1 212 757 0906, FAX: +1 212 713 0075
Email: [email protected]
CSC Camera Service Center – Film Equipment Rental – Florida, USA
2385 Stirling Road, Fort Lauderdale, FL 33312, USA
Voice phone: +1 954 322 4545, FAX: +1 954 322 4188
Email: [email protected]
World Wide Web www.arri.com
STATUS MESSAGES, WARNINGS AND TROUBLE SHOOTING LIST
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003
WARNING AND STATUS
MESSAGES
EXPLANATIONS/SUGGESTED REMEDY
Adapter Cover missing • Always use the Dual Port Adapter cover (Not the plastic type!) while this warning is shown, the camera can run.
Adapter Cover •
Adapter Door open • When mounting Lite magazine on the Studio, you can open the
(Adapter in preparation) Magazine Adapter’s door for threading purposes.
ATTENTION: If this door stays open, the warning will remain on
the displays, but without preventing the camera to run.
Adapter Door •
Async • • First of all, try to run the camera with a correct power supply. If the warning ASYNC persists while using a correct power supply and synchronizing the camera with a sync signal, check this signal and all the dedicated cable connections. If the warning still persists, consult an ARRICAM Maintenance Centre.
Buckle Trip • • Check the film threading. Close the film guides and place – in the Studio only – the buckle trip in its vertical rest position.
Communication Error • Consult an ARRICAM Maintenance Centre.
Dust Check • • When pushing briefly the dc button, the mirror will be turned out of the viewing position and the shutter will – if it is not -– open to
180°. While the mirror is out of the way, dc will be displayed.
After having pushed the dc button again – dc will fade out.
Film Jam • • Check the film threading. If there was no jam in the camera, check the magazine.
Film End < 20’ or < 6 m • • Caution, be ready to reload the camera.
Filter in the Gate • • Indicates that a gel filter has been inserted in the gate.
Firmware incompatibility • • Exchange the component or ask an ARRICAM Maintenance
Centre for firmware updating.
Heater • • Avoid turning on the camera if Heater is displayed – the movement could be too cold to work properly. Try to warm up the camera carefully, lens and magazine by using e.g. a Heated
Barney or a hairdryer. Do not place a hot luminaire too close to the camera.
Illegal Fps • • Select frames per second rate that fits with the possible range.
Inching • • While pushing the phase button on the Camera Control Panel, the movement will be inched.
ISB not ok (ISB Status) • Exchange the In-camera Slate Box or consult an ARRICAM
ISB nok (In the ISB line) • Maintenance Centre.
In-camera Slate Exposure • • Information about the exposing of the In-camera Slate while the camera is running up or down. During these periods, the shutter automatically closes to 0°. xxx entries in Take-list (ISB Status) • • Information about the number of takes recorded by the ISB.
(ISB Status): no exp module • Ask your ARRICAM Maintenance Centre to install the
Exposure Module.
No exposure module detected •
3.0 V (example in the ISB line) • While pushing the test button on the In-camera Slate Box, this message shows the voltage of the ISB On Board Battery. If it is below ~ 2.0 V, exchange the ISB Battery or consult an ARRICAM
Maintenance Centre.
ISB BAT 3.0 V (example) •
WARNING AND STATUS
MESSAGES
EXPLANATIONS / SUGGESTED REMEDY
Cannot set more than 9 Marks • Delete a Focus Mark to replace it by the new one.
(only with LDS Lens)
Push UP or DOWN to select, • Follow the instruction to handle the Focus Marks on the Lens then DELETE (only with LDS Lens) Data Display scale.
Push SET to select, then UP/DOWN • top renumber (only with LDS Lens)
Push UP or DOWN to select, • then hold SET to remember
(only with LDS Lens)
Lens Error – Use different lens • Check the system with a different lens.
Low Battery • • As soon as this message appears, replace the battery with a full charged one. If the message arrives during a take, you most probably will be able to complete it before stopping the camera.
Mag takes up film • • Be patient, the magazine is winding loose film on the cores. If the winding is not possible because film has not been properly attached to the take up core, the camera will change to not ready – so reload the magazine. If no magazine is mounted, e.g. for test purposes, the warning will disappear after about
25 sec. – only then you will be able to run the camera.
Take up runs free • Reload the magazine. The film was most likely not properly attached to the take up core.
Mag Take up side runs free. •
Reload Mag!
Magazine Error • Check the system with another magazine.
Magazine Error. Use another magazine •
Movement open • Close the movement.
Movement •
Movement/Shutter async • • Consult an ARRICAM Maintenance Centre.
Movement excess temperature • Movement motor overheated due to motor overload.
Movement or shutter speed too high • The camera exceeds its speed limit. Clear with PHASE button.
No SCB SYNC input • • No valid sync signal present. Check the synchronization signal source and all cable connections. When “R” appears in front of the fps, the REVERSE mode has been selected.
No Time-code (ISB) SYNC Input • • Exchange the ISB or consult an ARRICAM Maintenance
Centre. Note: no reverse run is possible in the TcSy mode.
Phase is fixed • • To alter the phase by means of the phase button, set the switch on the Speed Control Box to manual.
Check Ramp Values • Select fps, shutter and/or iris opening and ramping time that
fits with the possible range.
Ramp •
Reverse not possible • Use an Studio Magazine to shoot in reverse mode.
No Reverse •
Roll Out • • There is no more raw stock in the magazine – reload.
Shutter Error • Consult an ARRICAM Maintenance Centre.
Preset Shutter is not actual Shutter • Consult an ARRICAM Maintenance Centre.
Software incompatibility • • Exchange the component or udate the software.
Software Update in progress • • Wait until update is completed
Timeout for camera run • Camera cuts after 350m to prevent running endlessly.
TSB • • The timing shift function is activated.
CABLES AND CONNECTORS
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003 PAGE 1
Video in
BNC
Video out
Video Signal Source Speed Control Box SCB
ST/LT Video Assist Video Device
K LDD-FP-RDO
LDD-FP
Lens Data Display- Readout Unit
Focus Puller LT Frameglow Module
LDD-FP Remote Control Station RCS
LDD
Power dc in
STUDIO Battery
LITE Power Supply Unit
Power dc out
KC 20-S
(1.5 m/5 ft) K 2.41966.0
KC 29-SP-S
KC 60-SP-S
LDD
Lens Data Display Readout Unit
LDD LT Frameglow Module
Remote Control Station RCS
LDD
CAC
STUDIO Personal Computer
LITE 9p. serial interface
KC 79-S
(3 m/10 ft) K 2.54156.0
COM x
KC 61-S
(2 m/6 ft) K 4.54630.0
HE-3
KC 63-SP-S
STUDIO Heated Eyecup
LITE
CAC
STUDIO Speed Control Box SCB
LITE Manual Control Box Cable Adapter
Remote Control Station RCS
SAC
KC 65-S
(3 m/10 ft) K 2.54128.0
KC 69-S
(15 m/50 ft) K 2.54131.0
CABLES AND CONNECTORS
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003 PAGE 2
Sync Out
Pick-up Unit Speed Control Box SCB
Sync Generator on slaved camera
Sync In
KC 66-S
(10 m/33 ft) K 2.54129.0
CAC
STUDIO Lens Data Display LDD
LITE
LDD
KC 67-S
(3 m/10 ft) K 2.54132.0
KC 68-S
(15 m/50 ft) K 2.54133.0
CAC WHA-2
WRC-1
STUDIO Wireless Handheld Adapter WHA-2
LITE Wireless Remote Control WRC-1
KC 70-S
(3 m/10 ft) K 2.54135.0
CAC
STUDIO Iris Control Unit ICU
LITE
KC 72-S
(1 m/3 ft) K 2.54137.0
CAC
STUDIO Cable Drum
LITE
KC 73-S
(50 m/165 ft) K 2.54134.0
CAC
STUDIO CAC Distribution Box
LITE
CAC
KC 74-S
(1 m/3 ft) K 2.54130.0
KC 75-S
(1 m /3 ft) K 2.54150.0
ST-LDB Adapter Plate ST-LDB Body Plate
CABLES AND CONNECTORS
ARRICAM System Users’ Guide 11/2003 PAGE 3
LCS
Lens Data Display LDD Speed Control Box SCB
SAC
KC 76-S
(3 m/10 ft) K 2.54153.0
LDD
KC 77-S
(0.2 m/8 in) K 2.54154.0
Adapter Cable for Lens Data Display LDD
KC 67-S/KC 68-S
CAC
STUDIO Speed Control Box SCB
LITE on slaved camera
Sync In
KC 78-S
(15 m 50 ft) K 2.54155.0
CAC
STUDIO Handheld PC (iPAQ)
LITE docking station
KC-H-1
(0.5 m/1.5 ft) K 4.52687.0
LC-M1-SP-S
LCS
WHA-2*
WHA-2
ST Lens Data Box ST-LDB Wireless Handheld Adapter WHA-2
LT Lens Data Box LT-LDB + Wireless Zomm Unit WZU-1
Remote Control Station* Wireless Focus/Iris Unit WFU-1
LCS
WHA-2*
WHA-2
ST Lens Data Box ST-LDB Wireless Handheld Adapter WHA-2
LT Lens Data Box LT-LDB + Wireless Zomm Unit WZU-1
Remote Control Station* Wireless Focus/Iris Unit WFU-1
LC-Z1-S
(3 m/10 ft) K 4.41395.0
LDD-FP
Lens Data Display- ST Lens Data Box ST-LDB
Focus Puller LT Lens Data Box LT-LDB
LDD-FP
LCS
LDDFP-LCS 600
(0.6 m/2 ft) K 4.52969.0
LDDFP-LCS 1000
(1 m/3 ft) K 2.54173.0
Acknowledgment
Like the ARRICAM System itself, this Users’ Guide consists of several interchangeable parts that will continuously be up-dated. In order to serve you best,
I would greatly appreciate your requests, inquiries, comments and suggestions mailed to [email protected]
I would like to express my gratitude to all friends and colleagues without their help this Users’ Guide would never became what it is. Among to many others, special thanks to Marc Shipman Müller in Berlin, Allan Fyfe in London, Klaus Jacumet, Marita Müller, Herman Popp,
Jochen Thieser, Andreas Weeber in Munich, Alain
Gautier in Paris, John Fauer ASC in Southampton/NY as well as Fritz Gabriel Bauer, Kurt Bednarsky, Hannes
Buchegger, Josef Handler, Michael Haubmann, Franz
Huber, Klemens Kehrer, Thomas Kittenberger, Hans
Nussbaumer, Wolfgang Ramsauer, Thomas Smidek,
Walter Trauninger and Hans Peter Trmal in Vienna.
Furthermore my thankfulness goes to my Camera-
Assistants Harald Staudach, Martin Bobal, Gottfried
Schmelzer and last but not least to Don Harris in
London and Gerhard Leitner for the proof reading as well as to Andreas Pauleschitz for designing and illustrating your ARRICAM System Users’ Guide.
Frédéric-Gérard Kaczek AAC
IMAGO Secretary General
Vienna – in December 2002
Version 03E update by John Duclos - November 2003
Copies of this ARRICAM Users’ Guide can be ordered at any ARRICAM Maintenance Centre or at the ARRI
Headquarters in Munich.
Part No. K 5.58508.0
It is possible to download this information from the internet: www.arri.com.
* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement